Bram Moolenaar | dd2a0d8 | 2007-05-12 15:07:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1 | *syntax.txt* For Vim version 7.1. Last change: 2007 May 11 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2 | |
| 3 | |
| 4 | VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar |
| 5 | |
| 6 | |
| 7 | Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring* |
| 8 | |
| 9 | Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or |
| 10 | color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim |
| 11 | doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its |
| 12 | limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody |
| 13 | calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that. |
| 14 | |
| 15 | Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary |
| 16 | terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the |
| 17 | GUI version, gvim. |
| 18 | |
| 19 | In the User Manual: |
| 20 | |usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting. |
| 21 | |usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file. |
| 22 | |
| 23 | 1. Quick start |:syn-qstart| |
| 24 | 2. Syntax files |:syn-files| |
| 25 | 3. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading| |
| 26 | 4. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks| |
| 27 | 5. Defining a syntax |:syn-define| |
| 28 | 6. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments| |
| 29 | 7. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern| |
| 30 | 8. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster| |
| 31 | 9. Including syntax files |:syn-include| |
| 32 | 10. Synchronizing |:syn-sync| |
| 33 | 11. Listing syntax items |:syntax| |
| 34 | 12. Highlight command |:highlight| |
| 35 | 13. Linking groups |:highlight-link| |
| 36 | 14. Cleaning up |:syn-clear| |
| 37 | 15. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight| |
| 38 | 16. Color xterms |xterm-color| |
| 39 | |
| 40 | {Vi does not have any of these commands} |
| 41 | |
| 42 | Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been |
| 43 | disabled at compile time. |
| 44 | |
| 45 | ============================================================================== |
| 46 | 1. Quick start *:syn-qstart* |
| 47 | |
| 48 | *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable* |
| 49 | This command switches on syntax highlighting: > |
| 50 | |
| 51 | :syntax enable |
| 52 | |
| 53 | What this command actually does is to execute the command > |
| 54 | :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 55 | |
| 56 | If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find |
| 57 | the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just |
| 58 | fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the |
| 59 | directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files |
| 60 | are in the "/usr/vim/vim50/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to |
| 61 | "/usr/vim/vim50". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim. |
| 62 | |
| 63 | *:syn-on* *:syntax-on* |
| 64 | The ":syntax enable" command will keep your current color settings. This |
| 65 | allows using ":highlight" commands to set your preferred colors before or |
| 66 | after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the |
| 67 | defaults, use: > |
| 68 | :syntax on |
| 69 | < |
| 70 | *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal* |
| 71 | If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background |
| 72 | with: > |
| 73 | :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White |
| 74 | For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|. |
| 75 | For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|. |
| 76 | |
| 77 | NOTE: The syntax files on MS-DOS and Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>. |
| 78 | The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of |
| 79 | file for your system. Although on MS-DOS and Windows the right format is |
| 80 | automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty. |
| 81 | |
| 82 | NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value |
| 83 | of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 84 | reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 85 | used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 86 | highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 87 | |
| 88 | :gui " open window and set default for 'background' |
| 89 | :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors |
| 90 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 91 | NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 92 | foreground! Use ":gui -f" then. |
| 93 | |
| 94 | |
| 95 | You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command > |
| 96 | :if exists("syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif |
| 97 | |
| 98 | To put this into a mapping, you can use: > |
| 99 | :map <F7> :if exists("syntax_on") <Bar> |
| 100 | \ syntax off <Bar> |
| 101 | \ else <Bar> |
| 102 | \ syntax enable <Bar> |
| 103 | \ endif <CR> |
| 104 | [using the |<>| notation, type this literally] |
| 105 | |
| 106 | Details |
| 107 | The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how |
| 108 | this works, look in the file: |
| 109 | command file ~ |
| 110 | :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 111 | :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 112 | :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim |
| 113 | :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim |
| 114 | Also see |syntax-loading|. |
| 115 | |
| 116 | ============================================================================== |
| 117 | 2. Syntax files *:syn-files* |
| 118 | |
| 119 | The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in |
| 120 | a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the |
| 121 | name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters, |
| 122 | a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem). |
| 123 | Examples: |
| 124 | c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim |
| 125 | cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim |
| 126 | |
| 127 | The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But |
| 128 | the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a |
| 129 | language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one, |
| 130 | for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: > |
| 131 | :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim |
| 132 | |
| 133 | The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: > |
| 134 | :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim |
| 135 | :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim |
| 136 | These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim. |
| 137 | |
| 138 | |
| 139 | MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile* |
| 140 | |
| 141 | When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these |
| 142 | automatically with ":syntax enable", do this: |
| 143 | |
| 144 | 1. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item |
| 145 | of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: > |
| 146 | mkdir ~/.vim |
| 147 | |
| 148 | 2. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: > |
| 149 | mkdir ~/.vim/syntax |
| 150 | |
| 151 | 3. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write |
| 152 | it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: > |
| 153 | :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim |
| 154 | |
| 155 | Now you can start using your syntax file manually: > |
| 156 | :set syntax=mine |
| 157 | You don't have to exit Vim to use this. |
| 158 | |
| 159 | If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|. |
| 160 | |
| 161 | If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user |
| 162 | to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'. |
| 163 | |
| 164 | |
| 165 | ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add* |
| 166 | |
| 167 | If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to |
| 168 | add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps: |
| 169 | |
| 170 | 1. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above. |
| 171 | |
| 172 | 2. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: > |
| 173 | mkdir ~/.vim/after |
| 174 | mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax |
| 175 | |
| 176 | 3. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For |
| 177 | example, to change the colors for the C syntax: > |
| 178 | highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green |
| 179 | |
| 180 | 4. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the |
| 181 | syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: > |
| 182 | :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim |
| 183 | |
| 184 | That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be |
| 185 | different. You don't even have to restart Vim. |
| 186 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 5313dcb | 2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 187 | If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name. |
| 188 | All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example: |
| 189 | ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim |
| 190 | ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim |
| 191 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 192 | |
| 193 | REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace* |
| 194 | |
| 195 | If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new |
| 196 | version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure |
| 197 | that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'. |
| 198 | Vim will only load the first syntax file found. |
| 199 | |
| 200 | |
| 201 | NAMING CONVENTIONS |
| 202 | *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18* |
| 203 | The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits |
| 204 | and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*" |
| 205 | |
| 206 | To be able to allow each user to pick his favorite set of colors, there must |
| 207 | be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages. |
| 208 | These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly |
| 209 | you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"): |
| 210 | |
| 211 | *Comment any comment |
| 212 | |
| 213 | *Constant any constant |
| 214 | String a string constant: "this is a string" |
| 215 | Character a character constant: 'c', '\n' |
| 216 | Number a number constant: 234, 0xff |
| 217 | Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false |
| 218 | Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10 |
| 219 | |
| 220 | *Identifier any variable name |
| 221 | Function function name (also: methods for classes) |
| 222 | |
| 223 | *Statement any statement |
| 224 | Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc. |
| 225 | Repeat for, do, while, etc. |
| 226 | Label case, default, etc. |
| 227 | Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc. |
| 228 | Keyword any other keyword |
| 229 | Exception try, catch, throw |
| 230 | |
| 231 | *PreProc generic Preprocessor |
| 232 | Include preprocessor #include |
| 233 | Define preprocessor #define |
| 234 | Macro same as Define |
| 235 | PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc. |
| 236 | |
| 237 | *Type int, long, char, etc. |
| 238 | StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc. |
| 239 | Structure struct, union, enum, etc. |
| 240 | Typedef A typedef |
| 241 | |
| 242 | *Special any special symbol |
| 243 | SpecialChar special character in a constant |
| 244 | Tag you can use CTRL-] on this |
| 245 | Delimiter character that needs attention |
| 246 | SpecialComment special things inside a comment |
| 247 | Debug debugging statements |
| 248 | |
| 249 | *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links |
| 250 | |
| 251 | *Ignore left blank, hidden |
| 252 | |
| 253 | *Error any erroneous construct |
| 254 | |
| 255 | *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the |
| 256 | keywords TODO FIXME and XXX |
| 257 | |
| 258 | The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups. |
| 259 | For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting. |
| 260 | The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same |
| 261 | highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands |
| 262 | after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file. |
| 263 | |
| 264 | Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string" |
| 265 | can be used for the same group. |
| 266 | |
| 267 | The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name: |
| 268 | NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained |
| 269 | |
| 270 | ============================================================================== |
| 271 | 3. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading* |
| 272 | |
| 273 | This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is |
| 274 | issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are |
| 275 | located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|. |
| 276 | |
| 277 | ":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following: |
| 278 | |
| 279 | Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim |
| 280 | | |
| 281 | +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim |
| 282 | | |
| 283 | +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath' |
| 284 | | | |
| 285 | | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is |
| 286 | | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise |
| 287 | | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules |
| 288 | | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't |
| 289 | | | set yet. |
| 290 | | | |
| 291 | | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when |
| 292 | | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1* |
| 293 | | | |
| 294 | | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable. |
| 295 | | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2* |
| 296 | | |
| 297 | +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any |
| 298 | | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source |
| 299 | | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following. |
| 300 | | | |
| 301 | | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option |
| 302 | | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is |
| 303 | | | made for known file types. *synload-3* |
| 304 | | | |
| 305 | | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile* |
| 306 | | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. |
| 307 | | | *synload-4* |
| 308 | | | |
| 309 | | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file |
| 310 | | | type was detected yet. *synload-5* |
| 311 | | | |
| 312 | | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim| |
| 313 | | |
| 314 | +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file |
| 315 | | type has been detected. *synload-6* |
| 316 | | |
| 317 | +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each |
| 318 | already loaded buffer. |
| 319 | |
| 320 | |
| 321 | Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows: |
| 322 | |
| 323 | Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands. |
| 324 | | |
| 325 | +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3| |
| 326 | | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype' |
| 327 | | option is set to the file type. |
| 328 | | |
| 329 | +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not |
| 330 | | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This |
| 331 | | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following. |
| 332 | | | |
| 333 | | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile* |
| 334 | | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. |
| 335 | | | |
| 336 | | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file, |
| 337 | | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the |
| 338 | | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'. |
| 339 | | |
| 340 | +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this |
| 341 | | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets |
| 342 | | 'syntax' to the determined file type. |
| 343 | | |
| 344 | +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand |
| 345 | | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in |
| 346 | | 'runtimepath', with this command: |
| 347 | | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim |
| 348 | | |
| 349 | +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are |
| 350 | triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific |
| 351 | syntax. |
| 352 | |
| 353 | ============================================================================== |
| 354 | 4. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks* |
| 355 | |
| 356 | *b:current_syntax-variable* |
| 357 | Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the |
| 358 | "b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other |
| 359 | settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: > |
| 360 | :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh" |
| 361 | :au BufReadPost * do-some-things |
| 362 | :au BufReadPost * endif |
| 363 | |
| 364 | |
| 365 | 2HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML* |
| 366 | |
| 367 | This is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current |
| 368 | window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file. |
| 369 | |
| 370 | You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"! |
| 371 | Source the script to convert the current file: > |
| 372 | |
| 373 | :runtime! syntax/2html.vim |
| 374 | < |
| 375 | Warning: This is slow! |
| 376 | *:TOhtml* |
| 377 | Or use the ":TOhtml" user command. It is defined in a standard plugin. |
| 378 | ":TOhtml" also works with a range and in a Visual area: > |
| 379 | |
| 380 | :10,40TOhtml |
| 381 | |
| 382 | After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any HTML viewer, such |
| 383 | as Netscape. The colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. |
| 384 | |
| 385 | To restrict the conversion to a range of lines set "html_start_line" and |
| 386 | "html_end_line" to the first and last line to be converted. Example, using |
| 387 | the last set Visual area: > |
| 388 | |
| 389 | :let html_start_line = line("'<") |
| 390 | :let html_end_line = line("'>") |
| 391 | |
| 392 | The lines are numbered according to 'number' option and the Number |
| 393 | highlighting. You can force lines to be numbered in the HTML output by |
| 394 | setting "html_number_lines" to non-zero value: > |
| 395 | :let html_number_lines = 1 |
| 396 | Force to omit the line numbers by using a zero value: > |
| 397 | :let html_number_lines = 0 |
| 398 | Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: > |
| 399 | :unlet html_number_lines |
| 400 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 7b0294c | 2004-10-11 10:16:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 401 | Closed folds are put in the HTML as they are displayed. If you don't want |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 402 | this, use the |zR| command before invoking 2html, or use: > |
Bram Moolenaar | f4630b6 | 2005-05-20 21:31:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 403 | :let html_ignore_folding = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 7b0294c | 2004-10-11 10:16:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 404 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 405 | By default, HTML optimized for old browsers is generated. If you prefer using |
| 406 | cascading style sheets (CSS1) for the attributes (resulting in considerably |
| 407 | shorter and valid HTML 4 file), use: > |
| 408 | :let html_use_css = 1 |
| 409 | |
| 410 | By default "<pre>" and "</pre>" is used around the text. This makes it show |
| 411 | up as you see it in Vim, but without wrapping. If you prefer wrapping, at the |
| 412 | risk of making some things look a bit different, use: > |
| 413 | :let html_no_pre = 1 |
| 414 | This will use <br> at the end of each line and use " " for repeated |
| 415 | spaces. |
| 416 | |
| 417 | The current value of 'encoding' is used to specify the charset of the HTML |
| 418 | file. This only works for those values of 'encoding' that have an equivalent |
| 419 | HTML charset name. To overrule this set g:html_use_encoding to the name of |
| 420 | the charset to be used: > |
| 421 | :let html_use_encoding = "foobar" |
| 422 | To omit the line that specifies the charset, set g:html_use_encoding to an |
| 423 | empty string: > |
| 424 | :let html_use_encoding = "" |
| 425 | To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the g:html_use_encoding |
| 426 | variable: > |
| 427 | :unlet html_use_encoding |
| 428 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 47136d7 | 2004-10-12 20:02:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 429 | For diff mode a sequence of more than 3 filler lines is displayed as three |
| 430 | lines with the middle line mentioning the total number of inserted lines. If |
| 431 | you prefer to see all the inserted lines use: > |
| 432 | :let html_whole_filler = 1 |
| 433 | And to go back to displaying up to three lines again: > |
| 434 | :unlet html_whole_filler |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 435 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 436 | *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* |
| 437 | An alternative is to have the script generate XHTML (XML compliant HTML). To |
| 438 | do this set the "use_xhtml" variable: > |
| 439 | :let use_xhtml = 1 |
| 440 | To disable it again delete the variable: > |
| 441 | :unlet use_xhtml |
| 442 | The generated XHTML file can be used in DocBook XML documents. See: |
| 443 | http://people.mech.kuleuven.ac.be/~pissaris/howto/src2db.html |
| 444 | |
| 445 | Remarks: |
| 446 | - This only works in a version with GUI support. If the GUI is not actually |
| 447 | running (possible for X11) it still works, but not very well (the colors |
| 448 | may be wrong). |
| 449 | - Older browsers will not show the background colors. |
| 450 | - From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)! |
| 451 | |
| 452 | Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a |
| 453 | Unix shell: > |
| 454 | for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done |
| 455 | < |
| 456 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 457 | ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 458 | |
| 459 | ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign |
| 460 | any value to the respective variable. Example: > |
| 461 | :let abel_obsolete_ok=1 |
| 462 | To disable them use ":unlet". Example: > |
| 463 | :unlet abel_obsolete_ok |
| 464 | |
| 465 | Variable Highlight ~ |
| 466 | abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors |
| 467 | abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader |
| 468 | |
| 469 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 470 | ADA |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 471 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 472 | See |ft-ada-syntax| |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 473 | |
| 474 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 475 | ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 476 | |
| 477 | The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 478 | by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 479 | by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 480 | and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 481 | |
| 482 | :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim') |
| 483 | |
| 484 | will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code > |
| 485 | |
| 486 | <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[ |
| 487 | # everything inside is highlighted as perl |
| 488 | ]]></script> |
| 489 | |
| 490 | See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently. |
| 491 | |
| 492 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 493 | APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 494 | |
| 495 | The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting depending on Apache HTTP |
| 496 | server version, by default for 1.3.x. Set "apache_version" to Apache version |
| 497 | (as a string) to get highlighting for another version. Example: > |
| 498 | |
| 499 | :let apache_version = "2.0" |
| 500 | < |
| 501 | |
| 502 | *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k* |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 503 | ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax* |
| 504 | *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 505 | |
| 506 | Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection |
| 507 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your |
| 508 | startup vimrc: > |
| 509 | :let filetype_i = "asm" |
| 510 | Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use. |
| 511 | |
| 512 | There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name |
| 513 | extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a |
| 514 | line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax |
| 515 | files are included: |
| 516 | asm GNU assembly (the default) |
| 517 | asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly |
| 518 | asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly |
| 519 | ia64 Intel Itanium 64 |
| 520 | fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net) |
| 521 | masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86) |
| 522 | nasm Netwide assembly |
| 523 | tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and |
| 524 | MMX) |
| 525 | pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84) |
| 526 | |
| 527 | The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: > |
| 528 | :asmsyntax=nasm |
| 529 | Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be |
| 530 | one of the first five lines in the file. |
| 531 | |
| 532 | The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the |
| 533 | b:asmsyntax variable: > |
| 534 | :let b:asmsyntax=nasm |
| 535 | |
| 536 | If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of |
| 537 | the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly |
| 538 | language: > |
| 539 | :let asmsyntax=nasm |
| 540 | |
| 541 | As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used. |
| 542 | |
| 543 | |
| 544 | Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~ |
| 545 | |
| 546 | To enable a feature: > |
| 547 | :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm |
| 548 | To disable a feature: > |
| 549 | :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm |
| 550 | |
| 551 | Variable Highlight ~ |
| 552 | nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error |
| 553 | (parser dependent; not recommended) |
| 554 | nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error |
| 555 | nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo |
| 556 | |
| 557 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 558 | ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 559 | |
| 560 | *.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's |
| 561 | hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are |
| 562 | using. For Perl script use: > |
| 563 | :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl" |
| 564 | :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl" |
| 565 | For Visual Basic use: > |
| 566 | :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs" |
| 567 | :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs" |
| 568 | |
| 569 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 570 | BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | f193fff | 2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 571 | |
| 572 | The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN |
| 573 | for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants |
| 574 | are supported. |
| 575 | |
| 576 | Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify |
| 577 | in ones |.vimrc|: > |
| 578 | let baan_code_stds=1 |
| 579 | |
| 580 | *baan-folding* |
| 581 | |
| 582 | Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables |
| 583 | mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on |
| 584 | source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive. |
| 585 | |
| 586 | To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: > |
| 587 | let baan_fold=1 |
| 588 | Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The |
| 589 | indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not |
| 590 | considered equal to a tab). > |
| 591 | let baan_fold_block=1 |
| 592 | Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO, |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 593 | SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to |
Bram Moolenaar | f193fff | 2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 594 | match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). > |
| 595 | let baan_fold_sql=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 596 | Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set| |
Bram Moolenaar | f193fff | 2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 597 | the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in |
| 598 | .../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: > |
| 599 | set foldminlines=5 |
| 600 | set foldnestmax=6 |
| 601 | |
| 602 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 603 | BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 604 | |
| 605 | Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect |
| 606 | which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first |
| 607 | five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic", |
| 608 | otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual |
| 609 | Basic. |
| 610 | |
| 611 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 612 | C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 613 | |
| 614 | A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value |
| 615 | to the respective variable. Example: > |
| 616 | :let c_comment_strings=1 |
| 617 | To disable them use ":unlet". Example: > |
| 618 | :unlet c_comment_strings |
| 619 | |
| 620 | Variable Highlight ~ |
| 621 | c_gnu GNU gcc specific items |
| 622 | c_comment_strings strings and numbers inside a comment |
| 623 | c_space_errors trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab> |
| 624 | c_no_trail_space_error ... but no trailing spaces |
| 625 | c_no_tab_space_error ... but no spaces before a <Tab> |
| 626 | c_no_bracket_error don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors |
Bram Moolenaar | 677ee68 | 2005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 627 | c_no_curly_error don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors; |
| 628 | except { and } in first column |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 629 | c_no_ansi don't do standard ANSI types and constants |
| 630 | c_ansi_typedefs ... but do standard ANSI types |
| 631 | c_ansi_constants ... but do standard ANSI constants |
| 632 | c_no_utf don't highlight \u and \U in strings |
| 633 | c_syntax_for_h use C syntax for *.h files, instead of C++ |
| 634 | c_no_if0 don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments |
| 635 | c_no_cformat don't highlight %-formats in strings |
| 636 | c_no_c99 don't highlight C99 standard items |
| 637 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 293ee4d | 2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 638 | When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will |
| 639 | become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: > |
| 640 | :let c_no_comment_fold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | f9393ef | 2006-04-24 19:47:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 641 | "#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: > |
| 642 | :let c_no_if0_fold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 293ee4d | 2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 643 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 644 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 645 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable |
| 646 | to a larger number: > |
| 647 | :let c_minlines = 100 |
| 648 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first |
| 649 | displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The |
| 650 | disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 651 | |
| 652 | When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only |
| 653 | works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If |
| 654 | you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly. |
| 655 | |
| 656 | To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster. |
| 657 | Example: > |
| 658 | :au Syntax c call MyCadd() |
| 659 | :function MyCadd() |
| 660 | : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni |
| 661 | : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem |
| 662 | : hi link cMyItem Title |
| 663 | :endfun |
| 664 | |
| 665 | ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes |
| 666 | "NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is |
| 667 | not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant |
| 668 | highlighting: > |
| 669 | :hi link cConstant NONE |
| 670 | |
| 671 | If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the |
| 672 | highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket. |
| 673 | |
| 674 | If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file |
| 675 | an the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be |
| 676 | ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. > |
| 677 | syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold |
| 678 | syn sync fromstart |
| 679 | set foldmethod=syntax |
| 680 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 681 | CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 682 | |
| 683 | C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon |
| 684 | the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C. |
| 685 | |
| 686 | By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead |
| 687 | of C or C++: > |
| 688 | :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1 |
| 689 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 690 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 691 | CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 692 | |
| 693 | Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings |
| 694 | that are available. Additionally there is: |
| 695 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 696 | chill_space_errors like c_space_errors |
| 697 | chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings |
| 698 | chill_minlines like c_minlines |
| 699 | |
| 700 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 701 | CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 702 | |
| 703 | ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line. |
| 704 | If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: > |
| 705 | let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0 |
| 706 | This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use |
| 707 | "b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax |
| 708 | file). |
| 709 | |
| 710 | You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: > |
| 711 | :hi link ChangelogError Error |
| 712 | Or to avoid the highlighting: > |
| 713 | :hi link ChangelogError NONE |
| 714 | This works immediately. |
| 715 | |
| 716 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 717 | COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 718 | |
| 719 | COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh |
| 720 | development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance |
| 721 | versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting, |
| 722 | add this line to your .vimrc: > |
| 723 | :let cobol_legacy_code = 1 |
| 724 | To disable it again, use this: > |
| 725 | :unlet cobol_legacy_code |
| 726 | |
| 727 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 728 | COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 729 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 730 | The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 731 | comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 732 | |
| 733 | :let html_wrong_comments = 1 |
| 734 | |
| 735 | The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file. |
| 736 | |
| 737 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 738 | CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 739 | |
| 740 | This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually |
| 741 | used. |
| 742 | |
| 743 | Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems |
| 744 | symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish |
| 745 | between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the |
| 746 | "filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: > |
| 747 | |
| 748 | :let filetype_csh = "csh" |
| 749 | |
| 750 | For using tcsh: > |
| 751 | |
| 752 | :let filetype_csh = "tcsh" |
| 753 | |
| 754 | Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc, |
| 755 | tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 756 | will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 757 | "filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the |
| 758 | variable. |
| 759 | |
| 760 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 761 | CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 762 | |
| 763 | Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 764 | hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 765 | or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 766 | normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 767 | line to your .vimrc file: > |
| 768 | |
| 769 | :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1 |
| 770 | |
| 771 | Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) > |
| 772 | |
| 773 | :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1 |
| 774 | |
| 775 | To disable these again, use this: > |
| 776 | |
| 777 | :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc |
| 778 | :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp |
| 779 | < |
| 780 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 781 | CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 782 | |
| 783 | Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection |
| 784 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your |
| 785 | startup vimrc: > |
| 786 | :let filetype_w = "cweb" |
| 787 | |
| 788 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 789 | DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 790 | |
| 791 | Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files |
| 792 | according to freedesktop.org standard: http://pdx.freedesktop.org/Standards/ |
| 793 | But actually almost none implements this standard fully. Thus it will |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 794 | highlight all Unix ini files. But you can force strict highlighting according |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 795 | to standard by placing this in your vimrc file: > |
| 796 | :let enforce_freedesktop_standard = 1 |
| 797 | |
| 798 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 799 | DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 800 | |
| 801 | The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to |
| 802 | provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of |
| 803 | the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most |
| 804 | versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and |
| 805 | uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following |
| 806 | line to your startup file: > |
| 807 | let dircolors_is_slackware = 1 |
| 808 | |
| 809 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 810 | DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook* |
| 811 | DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax* |
| 812 | DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 813 | |
| 814 | There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you |
| 815 | are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you |
| 816 | automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type |
| 817 | defaults to XML. |
| 818 | You can set the type manually: > |
| 819 | :let docbk_type = "sgml" |
| 820 | or: > |
| 821 | :let docbk_type = "xml" |
| 822 | You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated. |
| 823 | Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": > |
| 824 | :set filetype=docbksgml |
| 825 | or: > |
| 826 | :set filetype=docbkxml |
| 827 | |
| 828 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 829 | DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 830 | |
| 831 | There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new |
| 832 | extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and |
| 833 | is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT |
| 834 | this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2. |
| 835 | Select the version you want with the following line: > |
| 836 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8299df9 | 2004-07-10 09:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 837 | :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 838 | |
| 839 | If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support |
| 840 | Windows 2000. |
| 841 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8299df9 | 2004-07-10 09:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 842 | A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 843 | "dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter |
| 844 | is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8299df9 | 2004-07-10 09:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 845 | |
| 846 | :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1 |
| 847 | |
| 848 | If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected. |
| 849 | |
| 850 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 851 | DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax* |
| 852 | |
| 853 | Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format |
| 854 | (similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp |
| 855 | and idl files, and should also work with java. |
| 856 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 857 | There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done |
| 858 | explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file. |
| 859 | Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 860 | :set syntax=c.doxygen |
| 861 | or > |
| 862 | // vim:syntax=c.doxygen |
| 863 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 864 | It can also be done automatically for c, cpp and idl files by setting the |
| 865 | global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by adding |
| 866 | the following to your .vimrc. > |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 867 | :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1 |
| 868 | |
| 869 | There are a couple of variables that have an affect on syntax highlighting, and |
| 870 | are to do with non-standard highlighting options. |
| 871 | |
| 872 | Variable Default Effect ~ |
| 873 | g:doxygen_enhanced_color |
| 874 | g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for |
| 875 | doxygen comments. |
| 876 | |
| 877 | doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic |
| 878 | and html_my_rendering underline. |
| 879 | |
| 880 | doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief |
| 881 | colour highlighting. |
| 882 | |
| 883 | doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 884 | punctuation of brief |
Bram Moolenaar | 8cacf35 | 2006-04-15 20:27:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 885 | |
| 886 | There are also some hilight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in |
| 887 | configuration. |
| 888 | |
| 889 | Highlight Effect ~ |
| 890 | doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing |
| 891 | punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section |
| 892 | doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the |
| 893 | \endlink from a \link section. |
| 894 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 895 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 896 | DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 897 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 898 | The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 899 | case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 900 | |
| 901 | :let dtd_ignore_case=1 |
| 902 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 903 | The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 904 | this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: > |
| 905 | |
| 906 | :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1 |
| 907 | |
| 908 | before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file. |
| 909 | Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the |
| 910 | 'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'. |
| 911 | Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant' |
| 912 | highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 913 | delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 914 | |
| 915 | :let dtd_no_param_entities=1 |
| 916 | |
| 917 | The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's. |
| 918 | |
| 919 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 920 | EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 921 | |
| 922 | While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 923 | syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to |
| 924 | highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 925 | highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 926 | |
| 927 | :let eiffel_ignore_case=1 |
| 928 | |
| 929 | Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments. |
| 930 | |
| 931 | Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: > |
| 932 | |
| 933 | :let eiffel_strict=1 |
| 934 | :let eiffel_pedantic=1 |
| 935 | |
| 936 | Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the |
| 937 | five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and |
| 938 | "NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names. |
| 939 | |
| 940 | Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style |
| 941 | guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and |
| 942 | lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords). |
| 943 | |
| 944 | If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void", |
| 945 | "Result", and "Precursor", you can use > |
| 946 | |
| 947 | :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1 |
| 948 | |
| 949 | instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off. |
| 950 | |
| 951 | Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already |
| 952 | experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: > |
| 953 | |
| 954 | :let eiffel_ise=1 |
| 955 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 956 | Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 957 | |
| 958 | :let eiffel_hex_constants=1 |
| 959 | |
| 960 | to your startup file. |
| 961 | |
| 962 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 963 | ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 964 | |
| 965 | The erlang highlighting supports Erlang (ERicsson LANGuage). |
| 966 | Erlang is case sensitive and default extension is ".erl". |
| 967 | |
| 968 | If you want to disable keywords highlighting, put in your .vimrc: > |
| 969 | :let erlang_keywords = 1 |
| 970 | If you want to disable built-in-functions highlighting, put in your |
| 971 | .vimrc file: > |
| 972 | :let erlang_functions = 1 |
| 973 | If you want to disable special characters highlighting, put in |
| 974 | your .vimrc: > |
| 975 | :let erlang_characters = 1 |
| 976 | |
| 977 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d68071d | 2006-05-02 22:08:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 978 | FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax* |
| 979 | |
| 980 | FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com |
| 981 | |
| 982 | Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki |
| 983 | syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make |
| 984 | editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the |
| 985 | start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length), |
| 986 | 'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak' |
| 987 | (to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen), |
| 988 | and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default. |
| 989 | |
| 990 | If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys |
| 991 | move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: > |
| 992 | :let flexwiki_maps = 1 |
| 993 | |
| 994 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 995 | FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 996 | |
| 997 | The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default |
| 998 | modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String, |
Bram Moolenaar | dd2a0d8 | 2007-05-12 15:07:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 999 | following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1000 | J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991. |
| 1001 | |
| 1002 | If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to |
| 1003 | redefine the following syntax groups: |
| 1004 | |
| 1005 | - formConditional |
| 1006 | - formNumber |
| 1007 | - formStatement |
| 1008 | - formHeaderStatement |
| 1009 | - formComment |
| 1010 | - formPreProc |
| 1011 | - formDirective |
| 1012 | - formType |
| 1013 | - formString |
| 1014 | |
| 1015 | Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and |
| 1016 | directives per default in the same syntax group. |
| 1017 | |
| 1018 | A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1019 | header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1020 | this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file > |
| 1021 | |
| 1022 | :let form_enhanced_color=1 |
| 1023 | |
| 1024 | The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1025 | gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1026 | conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction. |
| 1027 | |
| 1028 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1029 | FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1030 | |
| 1031 | Default highlighting and dialect ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1032 | Highlighting appropriate for f95 (Fortran 95) is used by default. This choice |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1033 | should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 95 is a |
| 1034 | superset of Fortran 90 and almost a superset of Fortran 77. |
| 1035 | |
| 1036 | Fortran source code form ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1037 | Fortran 9x code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1038 | syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set. |
| 1039 | |
| 1040 | When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1041 | form. If you always use free source form, then > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1042 | :let fortran_free_source=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1043 | in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1044 | form, then > |
| 1045 | :let fortran_fixed_source=1 |
| 1046 | in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. |
| 1047 | |
| 1048 | If the form of the source code depends upon the file extension, then it is |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1049 | most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin file. For more |
| 1050 | information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1051 | fortran files with an .f90 extension are written in free source form and the |
| 1052 | rest in fixed source form, add the following code to your ftplugin file > |
| 1053 | let s:extfname = expand("%:e") |
| 1054 | if s:extfname ==? "f90" |
| 1055 | let fortran_free_source=1 |
| 1056 | unlet! fortran_fixed_source |
| 1057 | else |
| 1058 | let fortran_fixed_source=1 |
| 1059 | unlet! fortran_free_source |
| 1060 | endif |
| 1061 | Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command |
| 1062 | precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file. |
| 1063 | |
| 1064 | When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free |
| 1065 | source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1066 | fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1067 | neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to |
| 1068 | determine which source form has been used by examining the first five columns |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1069 | of the first 250 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form are |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1070 | detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The algorithm |
| 1071 | should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a file that |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1072 | begins with 250 or more full-line comments, the script may incorrectly decide |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1073 | that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens, just add a |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1074 | non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns of the |
| 1075 | first twenty five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file. |
| 1076 | |
| 1077 | Tabs in fortran files ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1078 | Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1079 | fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries. |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1080 | Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like |
| 1081 | using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1082 | variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as > |
| 1083 | :let fortran_have_tabs=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1084 | placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1085 | mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins. |
| 1086 | |
| 1087 | Syntax folding of fortran files ~ |
| 1088 | If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable |
| 1089 | fortran_fold with a command such as > |
| 1090 | :let fortran_fold=1 |
| 1091 | to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that |
| 1092 | is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1093 | subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1094 | also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as > |
| 1095 | :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1 |
| 1096 | then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1097 | case constructs. If you also set the variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1098 | fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as > |
| 1099 | :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1 |
| 1100 | then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1101 | lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1102 | |
| 1103 | If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or |
| 1104 | fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1105 | you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1106 | units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program |
| 1107 | unit. |
| 1108 | |
| 1109 | More precise fortran syntax ~ |
| 1110 | If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as > |
| 1111 | :let fortran_more_precise=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1112 | then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1113 | statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be |
| 1114 | recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall |
| 1115 | construct. |
| 1116 | |
| 1117 | Non-default fortran dialects ~ |
| 1118 | The syntax script supports five Fortran dialects: f95, f90, f77, the Lahey |
| 1119 | subset elf90, and the Imagine1 subset F. |
| 1120 | |
| 1121 | If you use f77 with extensions, even common ones like do/enddo loops, do/while |
| 1122 | loops and free source form that are supported by most f77 compilers including |
| 1123 | g77 (GNU Fortran), then you will probably find the default highlighting |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1124 | satisfactory. However, if you use strict f77 with no extensions, not even free |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1125 | source form or the MIL STD 1753 extensions, then the advantages of setting the |
| 1126 | dialect to f77 are that names such as SUM are recognized as user variable |
| 1127 | names and not highlighted as f9x intrinsic functions, that obsolete constructs |
| 1128 | such as ASSIGN statements are not highlighted as todo items, and that fixed |
| 1129 | source form will be assumed. |
| 1130 | |
| 1131 | If you use elf90 or F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is |
| 1132 | that f90 features excluded from these dialects will be highlighted as todo |
| 1133 | items and that free source form will be assumed as required for these |
| 1134 | dialects. |
| 1135 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1136 | The dialect can be selected by setting the variable fortran_dialect. The |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1137 | permissible values of fortran_dialect are case-sensitive and must be "f95", |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1138 | "f90", "f77", "elf" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are ignored. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1139 | |
| 1140 | If all your fortran files use the same dialect, set fortran_dialect in your |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1141 | .vimrc prior to your syntax on statement. If the dialect depends upon the file |
| 1142 | extension, then it is most convenient to set it in a ftplugin file. For more |
| 1143 | information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1144 | fortran files with an .f90 extension are written in the elf subset, your |
| 1145 | ftplugin file should contain the code > |
| 1146 | let s:extfname = expand("%:e") |
| 1147 | if s:extfname ==? "f90" |
| 1148 | let fortran_dialect="elf" |
| 1149 | else |
| 1150 | unlet! fortran_dialect |
| 1151 | endif |
| 1152 | Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command |
| 1153 | precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file. |
| 1154 | |
| 1155 | Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1156 | the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis, by |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1157 | including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=f77 or |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1158 | elf or F or f90 or f95) in one of the first three lines in your file. For |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1159 | example, your older .f files may be written in extended f77 but your newer |
| 1160 | ones may be F codes, and you would identify the latter by including in the |
| 1161 | first three lines of those files a Fortran comment of the form > |
| 1162 | ! fortran_dialect=F |
| 1163 | F overrides elf if both directives are present. |
| 1164 | |
| 1165 | Limitations ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1166 | Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith |
| 1167 | strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1168 | because Fortran90 has no reserved words. |
| 1169 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1170 | For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and |
| 1171 | |ft-fortran-plugin|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1172 | |
| 1173 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1174 | FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1175 | |
| 1176 | In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match |
| 1177 | the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns |
| 1178 | appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these |
| 1179 | patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version |
| 1180 | number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm. |
| 1181 | |
| 1182 | For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/ |
| 1183 | as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: > |
| 1184 | |
| 1185 | :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 | |
| 1186 | \ set filetype=fvwm |
| 1187 | |
| 1188 | If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to |
| 1189 | find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting |
| 1190 | "rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located |
| 1191 | in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line > |
| 1192 | |
| 1193 | :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt" |
| 1194 | |
| 1195 | to your .vimrc file. |
| 1196 | |
| 1197 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1198 | GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1199 | |
| 1200 | The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and |
| 1201 | the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks) |
| 1202 | is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim| |
| 1203 | are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code: |
| 1204 | |
| 1205 | htmlString |
| 1206 | htmlValue |
| 1207 | htmlEndTag |
| 1208 | htmlTag |
| 1209 | htmlTagN |
| 1210 | |
| 1211 | Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline |
| 1212 | java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML |
| 1213 | group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight |
| 1214 | correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava |
| 1215 | to the contains clause. |
| 1216 | |
| 1217 | The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError |
| 1218 | group to make them easier to see. |
| 1219 | |
| 1220 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1221 | GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1222 | |
| 1223 | The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1224 | under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1225 | of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the |
| 1226 | filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file |
| 1227 | (see |filetype.txt|). |
| 1228 | |
| 1229 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1230 | HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1231 | |
| 1232 | The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1233 | Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1234 | syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives. |
| 1235 | |
| 1236 | If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a |
| 1237 | light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: > |
| 1238 | :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1 |
| 1239 | To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers, |
| 1240 | add: > |
| 1241 | :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1 |
| 1242 | To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: > |
| 1243 | :let hs_highlight_types = 1 |
| 1244 | And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: > |
| 1245 | :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1 |
| 1246 | If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in |
| 1247 | your .vimrc: > |
| 1248 | :let hs_highlight_debug = 1 |
| 1249 | |
| 1250 | The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor |
| 1251 | directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1252 | directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for |
| 1253 | operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1254 | as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: > |
| 1255 | :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1 |
| 1256 | |
| 1257 | The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to |
| 1258 | automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains |
| 1259 | TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1260 | or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1261 | in your .vimrc > |
| 1262 | :let lhs_markup = none |
| 1263 | for no highlighting at all, or > |
| 1264 | :let lhs_markup = tex |
| 1265 | to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup. |
| 1266 | For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of |
| 1267 | this variable, so e.g. > |
| 1268 | :let b:lhs_markup = tex |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1269 | will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1270 | set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or |
| 1271 | loading a file. |
| 1272 | |
| 1273 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1274 | HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1275 | |
| 1276 | The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows. |
| 1277 | |
| 1278 | The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. |
| 1279 | This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for |
| 1280 | closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are |
| 1281 | defined for you) |
| 1282 | |
| 1283 | Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag |
| 1284 | names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which |
| 1285 | makes it easy to spot errors |
| 1286 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1287 | Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1288 | names are colored differently than unknown ones. |
| 1289 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1290 | Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1291 | are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal |
| 1292 | text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>, |
| 1293 | while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1294 | only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1295 | <A href="somefile.html">). |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1296 | |
| 1297 | If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the |
| 1298 | following syntax groups: |
| 1299 | |
| 1300 | - htmlBold |
| 1301 | - htmlBoldUnderline |
| 1302 | - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic |
| 1303 | - htmlUnderline |
| 1304 | - htmlUnderlineItalic |
| 1305 | - htmlItalic |
| 1306 | - htmlTitle for titles |
| 1307 | - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings |
| 1308 | |
| 1309 | To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception |
| 1310 | of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the |
| 1311 | following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files |
| 1312 | are read during initialization) > |
| 1313 | :let html_my_rendering=1 |
| 1314 | |
| 1315 | If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at |
| 1316 | http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html |
| 1317 | |
| 1318 | You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your |
| 1319 | vimrc file: > |
| 1320 | :let html_no_rendering=1 |
| 1321 | |
| 1322 | HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the |
| 1323 | details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors. |
| 1324 | However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and |
| 1325 | ends with --!>) you can define > |
| 1326 | :let html_wrong_comments=1 |
| 1327 | |
| 1328 | JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as |
| 1329 | 'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1330 | programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1331 | supported, no other scripting language has been added yet. |
| 1332 | |
| 1333 | Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too. |
| 1334 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1335 | There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been |
| 1336 | written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1337 | following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language |
| 1338 | (the example comes from the asp.vim file): |
| 1339 | |
| 1340 | runtime! syntax/html.vim |
| 1341 | syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp |
| 1342 | |
| 1343 | Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain |
| 1344 | the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc. |
| 1345 | |
| 1346 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1347 | HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1348 | |
| 1349 | The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows: |
| 1350 | |
| 1351 | Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM |
| 1352 | doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change |
| 1353 | this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a |
| 1354 | different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: > |
| 1355 | :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray |
| 1356 | |
| 1357 | Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose. |
| 1358 | |
| 1359 | Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to |
| 1360 | signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening |
| 1361 | a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: > |
| 1362 | :set syntax=htmlos |
| 1363 | |
| 1364 | Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a |
| 1365 | block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively. |
| 1366 | |
| 1367 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1368 | IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1369 | |
| 1370 | Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for |
| 1371 | how to recognize this filetype. |
| 1372 | |
| 1373 | To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: > |
| 1374 | :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64" |
| 1375 | |
| 1376 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1377 | INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1378 | |
| 1379 | Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as |
| 1380 | most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols |
| 1381 | to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: > |
| 1382 | :let inform_highlight_simple=1 |
| 1383 | |
| 1384 | By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted, |
| 1385 | and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If |
| 1386 | you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you |
| 1387 | need to add this to your startup sequence: > |
| 1388 | :let inform_highlight_glulx=1 |
| 1389 | |
| 1390 | This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the |
| 1391 | set of highlighted system functions. |
| 1392 | |
| 1393 | The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when |
| 1394 | it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors |
| 1395 | by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your |
| 1396 | startup sequence: > |
| 1397 | :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1 |
| 1398 | |
| 1399 | By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler |
| 1400 | version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older |
| 1401 | Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your |
| 1402 | startup sequence: > |
| 1403 | :let inform_highlight_old=1 |
| 1404 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 9e54a0e | 2006-04-14 20:42:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1405 | IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax* |
| 1406 | |
| 1407 | IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In |
| 1408 | Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls. |
| 1409 | |
| 1410 | IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to |
| 1411 | rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1412 | repetitive but seems to work. |
Bram Moolenaar | 9e54a0e | 2006-04-14 20:42:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1413 | |
| 1414 | There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them |
| 1415 | are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions. |
| 1416 | |
| 1417 | The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions. |
| 1418 | |
| 1419 | Variable Effect ~ |
| 1420 | |
| 1421 | idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific |
| 1422 | extensions |
| 1423 | idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions |
| 1424 | idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but |
| 1425 | quite helpful) |
| 1426 | idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors |
| 1427 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1428 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1429 | JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1430 | |
| 1431 | The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options: |
| 1432 | |
| 1433 | In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was |
| 1434 | flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1435 | classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1436 | way, put the following line into your vim startup file: > |
| 1437 | :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1 |
| 1438 | |
| 1439 | All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To |
| 1440 | highlight them use: > |
| 1441 | :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1 |
| 1442 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1443 | You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1444 | download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html. |
| 1445 | If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io |
| 1446 | use the following: > |
| 1447 | :let java_highlight_java_io=1 |
| 1448 | Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported. |
| 1449 | |
| 1450 | Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1451 | how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1452 | functions: |
| 1453 | |
| 1454 | If you write function declarations that are always indented by either |
| 1455 | a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set > |
| 1456 | :let java_highlight_functions="indent" |
| 1457 | However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are |
| 1458 | supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use > |
| 1459 | :let java_highlight_functions="style" |
| 1460 | If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function |
| 1461 | declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the |
| 1462 | definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the |
| 1463 | original one and then adds the code to highlight functions. |
| 1464 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1465 | In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should |
Bram Moolenaar | ed20346 | 2004-06-16 11:19:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1466 | only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1467 | statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1468 | your startup file: > |
| 1469 | :let java_highlight_debug=1 |
| 1470 | The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special' |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1471 | characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1472 | new highlightings for the following groups.: |
| 1473 | Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType |
| 1474 | which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1475 | strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1476 | have opted to chose another background for those statements. |
| 1477 | |
| 1478 | In order to help you to write code that can be easily ported between |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1479 | Java and C++, all C++ keywords are marked as error in a Java program. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1480 | However, if you use them regularly, you may want to define the following |
| 1481 | variable in your .vimrc file: > |
| 1482 | :let java_allow_cpp_keywords=1 |
| 1483 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1484 | Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and |
| 1485 | creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code |
| 1486 | similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript |
| 1487 | and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however: |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1488 | 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by |
| 1489 | some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change |
| 1490 | the color change the group CommentTitle). |
| 1491 | 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'. |
| 1492 | 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special' |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1493 | 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1494 | and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function. |
| 1495 | To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 1496 | :let java_ignore_javadoc=1 |
| 1497 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1498 | If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you |
| 1499 | can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic |
| 1500 | scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you |
| 1501 | actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded |
| 1502 | CSS. The options to use are > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1503 | :let java_javascript=1 |
| 1504 | :let java_css=1 |
| 1505 | :let java_vb=1 |
| 1506 | |
| 1507 | In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors |
| 1508 | for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with > |
| 1509 | :hi link javaParen Comment |
| 1510 | or > |
| 1511 | :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff |
| 1512 | |
| 1513 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 1514 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable |
| 1515 | to a larger number: > |
| 1516 | :let java_minlines = 50 |
| 1517 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first |
| 1518 | displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger |
| 1519 | number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 1520 | |
| 1521 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1522 | LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1523 | |
| 1524 | Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the |
| 1525 | style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just |
| 1526 | define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: > |
| 1527 | :let lace_case_insensitive=1 |
| 1528 | |
| 1529 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1530 | LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1531 | |
| 1532 | Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter |
| 1533 | gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for > |
| 1534 | :syn sync minlines=300 |
| 1535 | may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization |
| 1536 | difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files). |
| 1537 | |
| 1538 | |
Bram Moolenaar | a5fac54 | 2005-10-12 20:58:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1539 | LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax* |
| 1540 | |
| 1541 | The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: > |
| 1542 | |
| 1543 | g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted |
| 1544 | as if the contents of the string were lisp. |
| 1545 | Useful for AutoLisp. |
| 1546 | g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels |
| 1547 | of parenthesization will receive different |
| 1548 | highlighting. |
| 1549 | < |
| 1550 | The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for |
| 1551 | the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of |
| 1552 | colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode |
| 1553 | specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the |
| 1554 | usual colorscheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual |
| 1555 | highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|). |
| 1556 | |
| 1557 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1558 | LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1559 | |
| 1560 | There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting. |
| 1561 | |
| 1562 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > |
| 1563 | |
| 1564 | :let lite_sql_query = 1 |
| 1565 | |
| 1566 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 1567 | set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 1568 | |
| 1569 | :let lite_minlines = 200 |
| 1570 | |
| 1571 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1572 | LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1573 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1574 | LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensj| C. The |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1575 | file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother |
| 1576 | users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you |
| 1577 | should set a variable in your .vimrc file: > |
| 1578 | |
| 1579 | :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1 |
| 1580 | |
| 1581 | If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a |
| 1582 | modeline. For a LPC file: |
| 1583 | |
| 1584 | // vim:set ft=lpc: |
| 1585 | |
| 1586 | For a C file that is recognized as LPC: |
| 1587 | |
| 1588 | // vim:set ft=c: |
| 1589 | |
| 1590 | If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file. |
| 1591 | |
| 1592 | There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1593 | used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1594 | and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also |
| 1595 | asserts the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when |
| 1596 | you are using the latest version of MudOS: > |
| 1597 | |
| 1598 | :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1 |
| 1599 | |
| 1600 | For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: > |
| 1601 | |
| 1602 | :let lpc_compat_32 = 1 |
| 1603 | |
| 1604 | For LPC4 series of LPC: > |
| 1605 | |
| 1606 | :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1 |
| 1607 | |
| 1608 | For uLPC series of LPC: |
| 1609 | uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax |
| 1610 | instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike |
| 1611 | |
| 1612 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1613 | LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1614 | |
Bram Moolenaar | fc1421e | 2006-04-20 22:17:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1615 | This syntax file may be used for Lua 4.0, Lua 5.0 or Lua 5.1 (the latter is |
| 1616 | the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables |
| 1617 | lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua |
| 1618 | 4.0 syntax highlighting, use this command: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1619 | |
| 1620 | :let lua_version = 4 |
| 1621 | |
Bram Moolenaar | fc1421e | 2006-04-20 22:17:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1622 | If you are using Lua 5.0, use these commands: > |
| 1623 | |
| 1624 | :let lua_version = 5 |
| 1625 | :let lua_subversion = 0 |
| 1626 | |
| 1627 | To restore highlighting for Lua 5.1: > |
| 1628 | |
| 1629 | :let lua_version = 5 |
| 1630 | :let lua_subversion = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1631 | |
| 1632 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1633 | MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1634 | |
| 1635 | Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures, |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1636 | quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1637 | signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by |
| 1638 | whitespaces and end with a newline. |
| 1639 | |
| 1640 | Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>' |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1641 | as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1642 | only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space). |
| 1643 | |
| 1644 | By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1645 | displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1646 | with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: > |
| 1647 | |
| 1648 | :let mail_minlines = 30 |
| 1649 | |
| 1650 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1651 | MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1652 | |
| 1653 | In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot |
| 1654 | errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this |
| 1655 | feature off by using: > |
| 1656 | |
| 1657 | :let make_no_commands = 1 |
| 1658 | |
| 1659 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1660 | MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1661 | |
| 1662 | Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language |
| 1663 | supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user. |
| 1664 | The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be |
| 1665 | highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: > |
| 1666 | |
| 1667 | :let mvpkg_all= 1 |
| 1668 | |
| 1669 | to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by |
| 1670 | choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to |
| 1671 | 1, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing |
| 1672 | $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim). |
| 1673 | |
| 1674 | Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors > |
| 1675 | mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process |
| 1676 | mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex |
| 1677 | mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats |
| 1678 | mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student |
| 1679 | mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools |
| 1680 | mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor |
| 1681 | mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder |
| 1682 | mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries |
| 1683 | |
| 1684 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1685 | MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 34cdc3e | 2005-05-18 22:24:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1686 | |
| 1687 | Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you |
| 1688 | have the following in your .vimrc: > |
| 1689 | |
| 1690 | let filetype_m = "mma" |
| 1691 | |
| 1692 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1693 | MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1694 | |
| 1695 | If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your |
| 1696 | highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style |
| 1697 | comments: > |
| 1698 | |
| 1699 | :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1 |
| 1700 | |
| 1701 | To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: > |
| 1702 | |
| 1703 | :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1 |
| 1704 | |
| 1705 | To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching |
| 1706 | '%(' and '%)' inside strings: > |
| 1707 | |
| 1708 | :let moo_no_regexp = 1 |
| 1709 | |
| 1710 | Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: > |
| 1711 | |
| 1712 | :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1 |
| 1713 | |
| 1714 | To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): > |
| 1715 | |
| 1716 | :let moo_builtin_properties = 1 |
| 1717 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1718 | Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1719 | use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group. |
| 1720 | To enable this option: > |
| 1721 | |
| 1722 | :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1 |
| 1723 | |
| 1724 | An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: > |
| 1725 | |
| 1726 | :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained |
| 1727 | |
| 1728 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1729 | MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1730 | |
| 1731 | There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting. |
| 1732 | |
| 1733 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > |
| 1734 | |
| 1735 | :let msql_sql_query = 1 |
| 1736 | |
| 1737 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 1738 | set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 1739 | |
| 1740 | :let msql_minlines = 200 |
| 1741 | |
| 1742 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1743 | NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1744 | |
| 1745 | There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting. |
| 1746 | |
| 1747 | If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as |
| 1748 | errors, use this: > |
| 1749 | |
| 1750 | :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1 |
| 1751 | |
| 1752 | If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset. |
| 1753 | |
| 1754 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1755 | NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1756 | |
| 1757 | The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to |
| 1758 | activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you |
| 1759 | can use them. |
| 1760 | |
| 1761 | For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1762 | processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1763 | features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: > |
| 1764 | |
| 1765 | :let b:nroff_is_groff = 1 |
| 1766 | |
| 1767 | Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in |
| 1768 | Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and |
| 1769 | there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1770 | you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1771 | can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's |
| 1772 | native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly: |
| 1773 | \[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm |
| 1774 | accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim |
| 1775 | environments. |
| 1776 | |
| 1777 | In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should |
| 1778 | follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation. |
| 1779 | |
| 1780 | 1. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines. |
| 1781 | |
| 1782 | 2. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period, |
| 1783 | exclamation mark, etc. |
| 1784 | |
| 1785 | 3. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a |
| 1786 | carriage return. |
| 1787 | |
| 1788 | The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking |
| 1789 | algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above. |
| 1790 | |
| 1791 | Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and, |
| 1792 | furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and |
| 1793 | vertical space input will be output as is. |
| 1794 | |
| 1795 | Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences |
| 1796 | than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common |
| 1797 | practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1798 | marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1799 | need to maintaining regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing |
| 1800 | spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: > |
| 1801 | |
| 1802 | :let nroff_space_errors = 1 |
| 1803 | |
| 1804 | Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere |
| 1805 | with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching |
| 1806 | highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1807 | "nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1808 | |
| 1809 | hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse |
| 1810 | hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold |
| 1811 | \ gui=reverse,bold |
| 1812 | |
| 1813 | If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as |
| 1814 | with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc |
| 1815 | file: > |
| 1816 | |
| 1817 | let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1 |
| 1818 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 69a7cb4 | 2004-06-20 12:51:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1819 | As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1820 | paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package. |
| 1821 | |
| 1822 | Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling |
| 1823 | groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default. |
| 1824 | |
| 1825 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1826 | OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1827 | |
| 1828 | The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml, |
| 1829 | .mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable > |
| 1830 | |
| 1831 | :let ocaml_revised = 1 |
| 1832 | |
| 1833 | you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported |
| 1834 | by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable > |
| 1835 | |
| 1836 | :let ocaml_noend_error = 1 |
| 1837 | |
| 1838 | prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources |
| 1839 | contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore. |
| 1840 | |
| 1841 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1842 | PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1843 | |
| 1844 | The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extend, .pxml |
| 1845 | and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1846 | as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml |
| 1847 | sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1848 | you set the variable: > |
| 1849 | |
| 1850 | :let papp_include_html=1 |
| 1851 | |
| 1852 | in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml |
| 1853 | sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1854 | edit sensibly. ;) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1855 | |
| 1856 | The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at |
| 1857 | http://papp.plan9.de. |
| 1858 | |
| 1859 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1860 | PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1861 | |
| 1862 | Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal. If the automatic detection |
| 1863 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your |
| 1864 | startup vimrc: > |
| 1865 | |
| 1866 | :let filetype_p = "pascal" |
| 1867 | |
| 1868 | The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions |
| 1869 | provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler. |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1870 | Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1871 | enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the |
| 1872 | following line to your startup file: > |
| 1873 | |
| 1874 | :let pascal_traditional=1 |
| 1875 | |
| 1876 | To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments, |
| 1877 | keywords, etc): > |
| 1878 | |
| 1879 | :let pascal_delphi=1 |
| 1880 | |
| 1881 | |
| 1882 | The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +, |
| 1883 | *, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol |
| 1884 | operators, add the following line to your startup file: > |
| 1885 | |
| 1886 | :let pascal_symbol_operator=1 |
| 1887 | |
| 1888 | Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: > |
| 1889 | |
| 1890 | :let pascal_no_functions=1 |
| 1891 | |
| 1892 | Furthermore, there are specific variable for some compiler. Besides |
| 1893 | pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to |
| 1894 | match Turbo Pascal. > |
| 1895 | |
| 1896 | :let pascal_gpc=1 |
| 1897 | |
| 1898 | or > |
| 1899 | |
| 1900 | :let pascal_fpc=1 |
| 1901 | |
| 1902 | To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the |
| 1903 | pascal_one_line_string variable. > |
| 1904 | |
| 1905 | :let pascal_one_line_string=1 |
| 1906 | |
| 1907 | If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs |
| 1908 | will be highlighted as Error. > |
| 1909 | |
| 1910 | :let pascal_no_tabs=1 |
| 1911 | |
| 1912 | |
| 1913 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1914 | PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1915 | |
| 1916 | There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting. |
| 1917 | |
| 1918 | If you use POD files or POD segments, you might: > |
| 1919 | |
| 1920 | :let perl_include_pod = 1 |
| 1921 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1922 | The reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch |
| 1923 | off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1924 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1925 | To handle package references in variable and function names not differently |
| 1926 | from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1927 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1928 | :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1929 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1930 | (In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables" |
| 1931 | enabled it.) |
| 1932 | |
| 1933 | If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: > |
| 1934 | |
| 1935 | :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1 |
| 1936 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 3fdfa4a | 2004-10-07 21:02:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1937 | (In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1938 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1939 | The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be |
| 1940 | highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1941 | perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line. |
| 1942 | |
| 1943 | "hello world!"; qq|hello world|; |
| 1944 | ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement) |
| 1945 | S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement) |
| 1946 | |
| 1947 | (^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all) |
| 1948 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1949 | The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1950 | synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly. |
| 1951 | If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1952 | then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1953 | out the line that causes the mistake. |
| 1954 | |
| 1955 | One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. > |
| 1956 | |
| 1957 | :let perl_no_sync_on_sub |
| 1958 | :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var |
| 1959 | |
| 1960 | Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for |
| 1961 | its attempts in syntax highlighting. > |
| 1962 | |
| 1963 | :let perl_sync_dist = 100 |
| 1964 | |
| 1965 | If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: > |
| 1966 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1967 | :let perl_fold = 1 |
| 1968 | |
| 1969 | If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: > |
| 1970 | |
| 1971 | :let perl_fold_blocks = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1972 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8ada17c | 2006-01-19 22:16:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1973 | To avoid folding packages or subs when perl_fold is let, let the appropriate |
| 1974 | variable(s): > |
| 1975 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1976 | :unlet perl_nofold_packages |
| 1977 | :unlet perl_nofold_subs |
Bram Moolenaar | 8ada17c | 2006-01-19 22:16:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1978 | |
| 1979 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1980 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1981 | PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1982 | |
| 1983 | [note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4 |
| 1984 | it has been renamed to "php"] |
| 1985 | |
| 1986 | There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting. |
| 1987 | |
| 1988 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: > |
| 1989 | |
| 1990 | let php_sql_query = 1 |
| 1991 | |
| 1992 | For highlighting the Baselib methods: > |
| 1993 | |
| 1994 | let php_baselib = 1 |
| 1995 | |
| 1996 | Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: > |
| 1997 | |
| 1998 | let php_htmlInStrings = 1 |
| 1999 | |
| 2000 | Using the old colorstyle: > |
| 2001 | |
| 2002 | let php_oldStyle = 1 |
| 2003 | |
| 2004 | Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: > |
| 2005 | |
| 2006 | let php_asp_tags = 1 |
| 2007 | |
| 2008 | Disable short tags: > |
| 2009 | |
| 2010 | let php_noShortTags = 1 |
| 2011 | |
| 2012 | For highlighting parent error ] or ): > |
| 2013 | |
| 2014 | let php_parent_error_close = 1 |
| 2015 | |
| 2016 | For skipping an php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing |
| 2017 | one: > |
| 2018 | |
| 2019 | let php_parent_error_open = 1 |
| 2020 | |
| 2021 | Enable folding for classes and functions: > |
| 2022 | |
| 2023 | let php_folding = 1 |
| 2024 | |
| 2025 | Selecting syncing method: > |
| 2026 | |
| 2027 | let php_sync_method = x |
| 2028 | |
| 2029 | x = -1 to sync by search (default), |
| 2030 | x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards, |
| 2031 | x = 0 to sync from start. |
| 2032 | |
| 2033 | |
Bram Moolenaar | d2cec5b | 2006-03-28 21:08:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2034 | PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax* |
| 2035 | |
| 2036 | TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain" |
| 2037 | variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX, |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2038 | see |ft-tex-plugin|. |
Bram Moolenaar | d2cec5b | 2006-03-28 21:08:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2039 | |
| 2040 | This syntax file has the option > |
| 2041 | |
| 2042 | let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1 |
| 2043 | |
| 2044 | if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}". |
| 2045 | |
| 2046 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2047 | PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2048 | |
| 2049 | PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files |
| 2050 | |
| 2051 | This syntax file has the options: |
| 2052 | |
| 2053 | - ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2054 | definitions. Possible values are |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2055 | |
| 2056 | ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2057 | colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables) |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2058 | |
| 2059 | ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate |
| 2060 | statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line |
| 2061 | continuation symbols |
| 2062 | |
| 2063 | The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1. |
| 2064 | |
| 2065 | - ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal |
| 2066 | HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text. |
| 2067 | |
| 2068 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2069 | PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2070 | |
| 2071 | There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting. |
| 2072 | |
| 2073 | If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: > |
| 2074 | |
| 2075 | :let phtml_sql_query = 1 |
| 2076 | |
| 2077 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 2078 | set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 2079 | |
| 2080 | :let phtml_minlines = 200 |
| 2081 | |
| 2082 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2083 | POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2084 | |
| 2085 | There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript. |
| 2086 | |
| 2087 | First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are |
| 2088 | currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original |
| 2089 | and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2. |
| 2090 | Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of |
| 2091 | extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest |
| 2092 | level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want |
| 2093 | highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: > |
| 2094 | |
| 2095 | :let postscr_level=2 |
| 2096 | |
| 2097 | If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is |
| 2098 | the most prevalent version currently. |
| 2099 | |
| 2100 | Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a |
| 2101 | particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of |
| 2102 | PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript! |
| 2103 | |
| 2104 | If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of |
| 2105 | Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as |
| 2106 | follows: > |
| 2107 | |
| 2108 | :let postscr_display=1 |
| 2109 | |
| 2110 | If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of |
| 2111 | Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable |
| 2112 | postscr_ghostscript as follows: > |
| 2113 | |
| 2114 | :let postscr_ghostscript=1 |
| 2115 | |
| 2116 | PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it |
| 2117 | useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can |
| 2118 | cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and |
| 2119 | character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working |
| 2120 | explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be |
| 2121 | highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: > |
| 2122 | |
| 2123 | :let postscr_fonts=1 |
| 2124 | :let postscr_encodings=1 |
| 2125 | |
| 2126 | There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In |
| 2127 | PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their |
| 2128 | operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators, |
| 2129 | if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical |
| 2130 | operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way |
| 2131 | or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be |
| 2132 | highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable |
| 2133 | postscr_andornot_binary as follows: > |
| 2134 | |
| 2135 | :let postscr_andornot_binary=1 |
| 2136 | < |
| 2137 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2138 | *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax* |
| 2139 | PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2140 | |
| 2141 | This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases. |
| 2142 | |
| 2143 | In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match |
| 2144 | the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns |
| 2145 | appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these |
| 2146 | patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or |
| 2147 | "term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap. |
| 2148 | |
| 2149 | For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap |
| 2150 | files, add the following: > |
| 2151 | |
| 2152 | :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" | |
| 2153 | \ set filetype=ptcap |
| 2154 | |
| 2155 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which |
| 2156 | are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines" |
| 2157 | internal variable to a larger number: > |
| 2158 | |
| 2159 | :let ptcap_minlines = 50 |
| 2160 | |
| 2161 | (The default is 20 lines.) |
| 2162 | |
| 2163 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2164 | PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2165 | |
| 2166 | Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection |
| 2167 | doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your |
| 2168 | startup vimrc: > |
| 2169 | :let filetype_w = "progress" |
| 2170 | The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be |
| 2171 | Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: > |
| 2172 | :let filetype_i = "progress" |
| 2173 | :let filetype_p = "progress" |
| 2174 | |
| 2175 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2176 | PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2177 | |
| 2178 | There are four options to control Python syntax highlighting. |
| 2179 | |
| 2180 | For highlighted numbers: > |
| 2181 | :let python_highlight_numbers = 1 |
| 2182 | |
| 2183 | For highlighted builtin functions: > |
| 2184 | :let python_highlight_builtins = 1 |
| 2185 | |
| 2186 | For highlighted standard exceptions: > |
| 2187 | :let python_highlight_exceptions = 1 |
| 2188 | |
| 2189 | For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: |
| 2190 | :let python_highlight_space_errors = 1 |
| 2191 | |
| 2192 | If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the |
| 2193 | preceding three options): > |
| 2194 | :let python_highlight_all = 1 |
| 2195 | |
| 2196 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2197 | QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2198 | |
| 2199 | The Quake syntax definition should work for most any FPS (First Person |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2200 | Shooter) based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2201 | a bit between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the |
| 2202 | syntax definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2203 | users to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2204 | can be set for the following effects: |
| 2205 | |
| 2206 | set to highlight commands only available in Quake: > |
| 2207 | :let quake_is_quake1 = 1 |
| 2208 | |
| 2209 | set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: > |
| 2210 | :let quake_is_quake2 = 1 |
| 2211 | |
| 2212 | set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: > |
| 2213 | :let quake_is_quake3 = 1 |
| 2214 | |
| 2215 | Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more |
| 2216 | commands than are actually available to you by the game. |
| 2217 | |
| 2218 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2219 | READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2220 | |
| 2221 | The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2222 | few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2223 | items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the |
| 2224 | command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: > |
| 2225 | let readline_has_bash = 1 |
| 2226 | |
| 2227 | This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and |
| 2228 | later, and part earlier) adds. |
| 2229 | |
| 2230 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2231 | REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2232 | |
| 2233 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 2234 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable |
| 2235 | to a larger number: > |
| 2236 | :let rexx_minlines = 50 |
| 2237 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first |
| 2238 | displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger |
| 2239 | number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 2240 | |
| 2241 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2242 | RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2243 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2244 | There are a number of options to the Ruby syntax highlighting. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2245 | |
| 2246 | By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2247 | of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2248 | experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support) |
| 2249 | you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2250 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2251 | :let ruby_no_expensive = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2252 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2253 | In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords. |
| 2254 | |
| 2255 | If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while |
| 2256 | scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting |
| 2257 | the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2258 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2259 | :let ruby_minlines = 100 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2260 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2261 | Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your |
| 2262 | largest class or module. |
| 2263 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2264 | Highlighting of special identifiers can be disabled by removing the |
| 2265 | rubyIdentifier highlighting: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2266 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2267 | :hi link rubyIdentifier NONE |
| 2268 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2269 | This will prevent highlighting of special identifiers like "ConstantName", |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2270 | "$global_var", "@@class_var", "@instance_var", "| block_param |", and |
| 2271 | ":symbol". |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2272 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2273 | Significant methods of Kernel, Module and Object are highlighted by default. |
| 2274 | This can be disabled by defining "ruby_no_special_methods": > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2275 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2276 | :let ruby_no_special_methods = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2277 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2278 | This will prevent highlighting of important methods such as "require", "attr", |
| 2279 | "private", "raise" and "proc". |
| 2280 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2281 | Ruby operators can be highlighted. This is enabled by defining |
| 2282 | "ruby_operators": > |
| 2283 | |
| 2284 | :let ruby_operators = 1 |
| 2285 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2286 | Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": > |
| 2287 | |
| 2288 | :let ruby_space_errors = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2289 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2290 | This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character |
| 2291 | as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and |
| 2292 | "ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after |
| 2293 | spaces respectively. |
| 2294 | |
| 2295 | Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": > |
| 2296 | |
| 2297 | :let ruby_fold = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2298 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | 943d2b5 | 2005-12-02 00:50:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2299 | This will set the 'foldmethod' option to "syntax" and allow folding of |
| 2300 | classes, modules, methods, code blocks, heredocs and comments. |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2301 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 2539402 | 2007-05-10 19:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2302 | Folding of multiline comments can be disabled by defining |
| 2303 | "ruby_no_comment_fold": > |
| 2304 | |
| 2305 | :let ruby_no_comment_fold = 1 |
| 2306 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2307 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2308 | SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 21cf823 | 2004-07-16 20:18:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2309 | |
| 2310 | By default only R5RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented. |
| 2311 | |
| 2312 | MzScheme-specific stuff will be used if b:is_mzscheme or g:is_mzscheme |
| 2313 | variables are defined. |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2314 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 293ee4d | 2004-12-09 21:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2315 | Also scheme.vim supports keywords of the Chicken Scheme->C compiler. Define |
| 2316 | b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them. |
Bram Moolenaar | 21cf823 | 2004-07-16 20:18:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2317 | |
| 2318 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2319 | SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2320 | |
| 2321 | The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many |
| 2322 | of them it's almost impossibly to cope. |
| 2323 | |
| 2324 | The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are |
| 2325 | case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2326 | used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2327 | highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: > |
| 2328 | :let sdl_2000=1 |
| 2329 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2330 | This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2331 | keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: > |
| 2332 | :let SDL_no_96=1 |
| 2333 | |
| 2334 | |
| 2335 | The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very |
| 2336 | satisfied with it for my own projects. |
| 2337 | |
| 2338 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2339 | SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2340 | |
| 2341 | To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo |
| 2342 | highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting > |
| 2343 | |
| 2344 | :let highlight_sedtabs = 1 |
| 2345 | |
| 2346 | in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs |
| 2347 | inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included |
| 2348 | by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is |
| 2349 | also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that, |
| 2350 | you can easily count the number of tabs in a string. |
| 2351 | |
| 2352 | Bugs: |
| 2353 | |
| 2354 | The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute |
| 2355 | command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned, |
| 2356 | transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong. |
| 2357 | (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the |
| 2358 | involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for |
| 2359 | each plausible pattern delimiter). |
| 2360 | |
| 2361 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2362 | SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2363 | |
| 2364 | The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows. |
| 2365 | |
| 2366 | The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag. |
| 2367 | This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for |
| 2368 | closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are |
| 2369 | defined for you) |
| 2370 | |
| 2371 | Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag |
| 2372 | names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors. |
| 2373 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2374 | Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2375 | names are colored differently than unknown ones. |
| 2376 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2377 | Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2378 | are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal |
| 2379 | text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal> |
| 2380 | <replaceable> <ulink> and <link>. |
| 2381 | |
| 2382 | If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the |
| 2383 | following syntax groups: |
| 2384 | |
| 2385 | - sgmlBold |
| 2386 | - sgmlBoldItalic |
| 2387 | - sgmlUnderline |
| 2388 | - sgmlItalic |
| 2389 | - sgmlLink for links |
| 2390 | |
| 2391 | To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the |
| 2392 | following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files |
| 2393 | are read during initialization) > |
| 2394 | let sgml_my_rendering=1 |
| 2395 | |
| 2396 | You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your |
| 2397 | vimrc file: > |
| 2398 | let sgml_no_rendering=1 |
| 2399 | |
| 2400 | (Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>) |
| 2401 | |
| 2402 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2403 | SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2404 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2405 | This covers the "normal" Unix (Borne) sh, bash and the Korn shell. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2406 | |
| 2407 | Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that |
| 2408 | various filenames are of specific types: > |
| 2409 | |
| 2410 | ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh |
| 2411 | bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash |
| 2412 | < |
| 2413 | If none of these cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined |
| 2414 | (ex. /bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, |
| 2415 | then that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to |
| 2416 | be shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2417 | sh is symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix). |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2418 | |
| 2419 | One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following three |
| 2420 | variables in your <.vimrc>: |
| 2421 | |
| 2422 | ksh: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2423 | let g:is_kornshell = 1 |
| 2424 | < posix: (using this is the same as setting is_kornshell to 1) > |
| 2425 | let g:is_posix = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2426 | < bash: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2427 | let g:is_bash = 1 |
| 2428 | < sh: (default) Borne shell > |
| 2429 | let g:is_sh = 1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2430 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2431 | If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a |
| 2432 | default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume |
| 2433 | the Borne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration |
Bram Moolenaar | 7fc904b | 2006-04-13 20:37:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2434 | statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of |
| 2435 | the sh your system uses in your <.vimrc>. |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2436 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2437 | If, in your <.vimrc>, you set > |
| 2438 | let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 |
| 2439 | > |
| 2440 | then various syntax items (HereDocuments and function bodies) become |
| 2441 | syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). |
| 2442 | |
| 2443 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 2444 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable |
| 2445 | to a larger number. Example: > |
| 2446 | |
| 2447 | let sh_minlines = 500 |
| 2448 | |
| 2449 | This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first |
| 2450 | displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger |
| 2451 | number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 2452 | |
| 2453 | If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To |
| 2454 | reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: > |
| 2455 | |
| 2456 | let sh_maxlines = 100 |
| 2457 | < |
| 2458 | The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to |
| 2459 | speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear. |
| 2460 | |
| 2461 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2462 | SPEEDUP (AspenTech plant simulator) *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2463 | |
| 2464 | The Speedup syntax file has some options: |
| 2465 | |
| 2466 | - strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for |
| 2467 | sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not |
| 2468 | other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section). |
| 2469 | |
| 2470 | - highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types |
| 2471 | like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2472 | plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2473 | the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include |
| 2474 | them in the syntax file. |
| 2475 | |
| 2476 | - oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the |
| 2477 | highlighting of # style comments. |
| 2478 | |
| 2479 | oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even |
| 2480 | number of #s. |
| 2481 | |
| 2482 | oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2483 | error. This is the default setting. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2484 | |
| 2485 | oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains |
| 2486 | more than one #. |
| 2487 | |
| 2488 | Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2489 | PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2490 | fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of |
| 2491 | the syntax file. |
| 2492 | |
| 2493 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2494 | SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax* |
| 2495 | *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 1056d98 | 2006-03-09 22:37:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2496 | *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2497 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 1056d98 | 2006-03-09 22:37:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2498 | While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own |
| 2499 | custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of |
| 2500 | SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default. |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2501 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 1056d98 | 2006-03-09 22:37:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2502 | Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax |
| 2503 | scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL |
| 2504 | supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a |
| 2505 | buffer by buffer basis. |
| 2506 | |
| 2507 | For more detailed instructions see |sql.txt|. |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2508 | |
| 2509 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2510 | TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2511 | |
| 2512 | This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim| |
| 2513 | for how the filetype is detected. |
| 2514 | |
| 2515 | Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2516 | is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2517 | this line to your .vimrc: > |
| 2518 | |
| 2519 | :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0 |
| 2520 | |
| 2521 | If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed |
| 2522 | when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable |
| 2523 | to a larger number: > |
| 2524 | |
| 2525 | :let tcsh_minlines = 100 |
| 2526 | |
| 2527 | This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2528 | displayed line. The default value is 15. The disadvantage of using a larger |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2529 | number is that redrawing can become slow. |
| 2530 | |
| 2531 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2532 | TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2533 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2534 | *tex-folding* |
| 2535 | Want Syntax Folding? ~ |
| 2536 | |
| 2537 | As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters, |
| 2538 | sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put > |
| 2539 | let g:tex_fold_enabled=1 |
| 2540 | in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a |
| 2541 | modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: > |
| 2542 | % vim: fdm=syntax |
| 2543 | < |
| 2544 | *tex-runon* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2545 | Run-on Comments/Math? ~ |
| 2546 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2547 | The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The |
| 2548 | highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and |
| 2549 | texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones |
| 2550 | terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized |
| 2551 | as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2552 | special "TeX comment" has been provided > |
| 2553 | %stopzone |
| 2554 | which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a |
| 2555 | texMathZone. |
| 2556 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2557 | *tex-slow* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2558 | Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~ |
| 2559 | |
| 2560 | If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for > |
| 2561 | :syn sync maxlines=200 |
| 2562 | :syn sync minlines=50 |
| 2563 | (especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2564 | increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group, |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2565 | if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?). |
| 2566 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2567 | *tex-morecommands* *tex-package* |
| 2568 | Wish To Highlight More Commmands? ~ |
| 2569 | |
| 2570 | LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full |
| 2571 | of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a |
| 2572 | package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support |
| 2573 | it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the |
| 2574 | techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided |
| 2575 | by syntax/tex.vim. |
| 2576 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2577 | *tex-error* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2578 | Excessive Error Highlighting? ~ |
| 2579 | |
| 2580 | The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus, |
| 2581 | although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate |
| 2582 | errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you, |
| 2583 | you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: > |
| 2584 | let tex_no_error=1 |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2585 | and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2586 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2587 | *tex-math* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2588 | Need a new Math Group? ~ |
| 2589 | |
| 2590 | If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following |
| 2591 | code shows you an example as to how you might do so: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2592 | call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform) |
| 2593 | You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix |
| 2594 | (currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself). |
| 2595 | As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: > |
| 2596 | call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1) |
| 2597 | You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group, |
| 2598 | and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim. |
| 2599 | The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group |
| 2600 | has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*). |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2601 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 488c651 | 2005-08-11 20:09:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2602 | *tex-style* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2603 | Starting a New Style? ~ |
| 2604 | |
| 2605 | One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in |
| 2606 | commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the |
| 2607 | following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag |
| 2608 | such use of @ as an error. To solve this: > |
| 2609 | |
| 2610 | :let b:tex_stylish = 1 |
| 2611 | :set ft=tex |
| 2612 | |
| 2613 | Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim> |
| 2614 | always accept such use of @. |
| 2615 | |
| 2616 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2617 | TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2618 | |
| 2619 | There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting. |
| 2620 | |
| 2621 | For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can |
| 2622 | set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: > |
| 2623 | |
| 2624 | :let tf_minlines = your choice |
| 2625 | |
| 2626 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2627 | VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2628 | |
| 2629 | There is a tradeoff between more accurate syntax highlighting versus |
| 2630 | screen updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase |
| 2631 | the g:vim_minlines variable. The g:vim_maxlines variable may be used |
| 2632 | to improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). |
| 2633 | |
| 2634 | g:vim_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines |
| 2635 | g:vim_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines |
| 2636 | |
| 2637 | The g:vimembedscript option allows for somewhat faster loading of syntax |
| 2638 | highlighting for vim scripts at the expense of supporting syntax highlighting |
| 2639 | for external scripting languages (currently perl, python, ruby, and tcl). |
| 2640 | |
| 2641 | g:vimembedscript == 1 (default) <vim.vim> will allow highlighting |
| 2642 | g:vimembedscript doesn't exist of supported embedded scripting |
| 2643 | languages: perl, python, ruby and |
| 2644 | tcl. |
| 2645 | |
| 2646 | g:vimembedscript == 0 Syntax highlighting for embedded |
| 2647 | scripting languages will not be |
| 2648 | loaded. |
| 2649 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 437df8f | 2006-04-27 21:47:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2650 | Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; VimL is a |
| 2651 | difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error |
| 2652 | highlighting is to put: > |
| 2653 | |
| 2654 | let g:vimsyntax_noerror = 1 |
| 2655 | |
| 2656 | in your |vimrc|. |
| 2657 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2658 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2659 | XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2660 | |
| 2661 | The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both |
| 2662 | variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect. |
| 2663 | You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable |
| 2664 | xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in |
| 2665 | your .vimrc. Example: > |
| 2666 | :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3 |
| 2667 | When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable. |
| 2668 | |
| 2669 | Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use |
| 2670 | "SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name |
| 2671 | highlighted. |
| 2672 | |
| 2673 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2674 | XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2675 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2676 | Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2677 | setting a global variable: > |
| 2678 | |
| 2679 | :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1 |
| 2680 | < |
| 2681 | *xml-folding* |
| 2682 | The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2683 | start and end tags. This can be turned on by > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2684 | |
| 2685 | :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1 |
| 2686 | :set foldmethod=syntax |
| 2687 | |
| 2688 | Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly, |
| 2689 | especially for large files. |
| 2690 | |
| 2691 | |
Bram Moolenaar | da2303d | 2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2692 | X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2693 | |
| 2694 | xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the |
| 2695 | XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings, |
| 2696 | you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm". |
| 2697 | |
| 2698 | To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it |
| 2699 | somewhere else with "P". |
| 2700 | |
| 2701 | Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: > |
| 2702 | :function! GetPixel() |
Bram Moolenaar | 61660ea | 2006-04-07 21:40:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2703 | : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1] |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2704 | : echo c |
| 2705 | : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c |
| 2706 | : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c |
| 2707 | :endfunction |
| 2708 | :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR> |
| 2709 | :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor |
| 2710 | This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen. |
| 2711 | It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you |
| 2712 | must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it. |
| 2713 | |
| 2714 | It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: > |
| 2715 | :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-* |
| 2716 | |
| 2717 | ============================================================================== |
| 2718 | 5. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410* |
| 2719 | |
| 2720 | Vim understands three types of syntax items: |
| 2721 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2722 | 1. Keyword |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2723 | It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword' |
| 2724 | option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a |
| 2725 | complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match). |
| 2726 | The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because |
| 2727 | "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is. |
| 2728 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2729 | 2. Match |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2730 | This is a match with a single regexp pattern. |
| 2731 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2732 | 3. Region |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2733 | This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match |
| 2734 | with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A |
| 2735 | "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern. |
| 2736 | |
| 2737 | Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group |
| 2738 | you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item |
| 2739 | to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment, |
| 2740 | and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a |
| 2741 | "Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make |
| 2742 | one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group. |
| 2743 | This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting |
| 2744 | each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting |
| 2745 | for a lot of groups. |
| 2746 | |
| 2747 | Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight |
| 2748 | group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used |
| 2749 | for the syntax group with the same name. |
| 2750 | |
| 2751 | In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was |
| 2752 | defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by |
| 2753 | using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a |
| 2754 | match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a |
| 2755 | keyword with ignoring case. |
| 2756 | |
| 2757 | |
| 2758 | PRIORITY *:syn-priority* |
| 2759 | |
| 2760 | When several syntax items may match, these rules are used: |
| 2761 | |
| 2762 | 1. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item |
| 2763 | defined last has priority. |
| 2764 | 2. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items. |
| 2765 | 3. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that |
| 2766 | start in later positions. |
| 2767 | |
| 2768 | |
| 2769 | DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390* |
| 2770 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2771 | :sy[ntax] case [match | ignore] |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2772 | This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with |
| 2773 | matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using |
| 2774 | "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all |
| 2775 | items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected. |
| 2776 | |
| 2777 | |
Bram Moolenaar | ce0842a | 2005-07-18 21:58:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2778 | SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell* |
| 2779 | |
| 2780 | :sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default] |
| 2781 | This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not |
| 2782 | in a syntax item: |
| 2783 | |
| 2784 | toplevel: Text is spell checked. |
| 2785 | notoplevel: Text is not spell checked. |
| 2786 | default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking. |
| 2787 | |
| 2788 | For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters |
| 2789 | |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then |
| 2790 | spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel". |
| 2791 | |
| 2792 | To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set. |
| 2793 | |
| 2794 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2795 | DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword* |
| 2796 | |
| 2797 | :sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}] |
| 2798 | |
| 2799 | This defines a number of keywords. |
| 2800 | |
| 2801 | {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment". |
| 2802 | [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. |
| 2803 | {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group. |
| 2804 | |
| 2805 | Example: > |
| 2806 | :syntax keyword Type int long char |
| 2807 | < |
| 2808 | The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to |
| 2809 | all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword. |
| 2810 | These examples do exactly the same: > |
| 2811 | :syntax keyword Type contained int long char |
| 2812 | :syntax keyword Type int long contained char |
| 2813 | :syntax keyword Type int long char contained |
Bram Moolenaar | fc1421e | 2006-04-20 22:17:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2814 | < *E789* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2815 | When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in |
| 2816 | Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the |
| 2817 | variations at once: > |
| 2818 | :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext] |
| 2819 | < |
| 2820 | Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the |
| 2821 | characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character |
| 2822 | isn't, the keyword will never be recognized. |
| 2823 | Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in |
| 2824 | 'iskeyword'. |
| 2825 | |
| 2826 | A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the |
| 2827 | keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest |
| 2828 | and a keyword can't contain anything else. |
| 2829 | |
| 2830 | Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even |
| 2831 | one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match |
| 2832 | instead. |
| 2833 | |
| 2834 | The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters. |
| 2835 | |
| 2836 | The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment |
| 2837 | differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained |
| 2838 | and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2839 | highlight group. Example: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2840 | :syn keyword vimCommand tag |
| 2841 | :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag |
| 2842 | < When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand" |
| 2843 | highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that |
| 2844 | contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used. |
| 2845 | |
| 2846 | |
| 2847 | DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match* |
| 2848 | |
| 2849 | :sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}] [excludenl] {pattern} [{options}] |
| 2850 | |
| 2851 | This defines one match. |
| 2852 | |
| 2853 | {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". |
| 2854 | [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. |
| 2855 | [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" |
| 2856 | extend a containing match or region. Must be |
| 2857 | given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl| |
| 2858 | {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match. |
| 2859 | See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 2860 | Note that the pattern may match more than one |
| 2861 | line, which makes the match depend on where |
| 2862 | Vim starts searching for the pattern. You |
| 2863 | need to make sure syncing takes care of this. |
| 2864 | |
| 2865 | Example (match a character constant): > |
| 2866 | :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1 |
| 2867 | < |
| 2868 | |
| 2869 | DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end* |
| 2870 | *E398* *E399* |
| 2871 | :sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}] |
| 2872 | [matchgroup={group-name}] |
| 2873 | [keepend] |
| 2874 | [extend] |
| 2875 | [excludenl] |
| 2876 | start={start_pattern} .. |
| 2877 | [skip={skip_pattern}] |
| 2878 | end={end_pattern} .. |
| 2879 | [{options}] |
| 2880 | |
| 2881 | This defines one region. It may span several lines. |
| 2882 | |
| 2883 | {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment". |
| 2884 | [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below. |
| 2885 | [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following |
| 2886 | start or end pattern matches only. Not used |
| 2887 | for the text in between the matched start and |
| 2888 | end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using |
| 2889 | a different group for the start or end match. |
| 2890 | See |:syn-matchgroup|. |
| 2891 | keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a |
| 2892 | match with the end pattern. See |
| 2893 | |:syn-keepend|. |
| 2894 | extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2895 | is contained in. See |:syn-extend|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2896 | excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$" |
| 2897 | extend a containing match or item. Only |
| 2898 | useful for end patterns. Must be given before |
| 2899 | the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl| |
| 2900 | start={start_pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of |
| 2901 | the region. See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 2902 | skip={skip_pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside |
| 2903 | the region where not to look for the end |
| 2904 | pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 2905 | end={end_pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of |
| 2906 | the region. See |:syn-pattern| below. |
| 2907 | |
| 2908 | Example: > |
| 2909 | :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ |
| 2910 | < |
| 2911 | The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order. |
| 2912 | There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more |
| 2913 | start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip |
| 2914 | pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It |
| 2915 | is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign |
| 2916 | (although it mostly looks better without white space). |
| 2917 | |
| 2918 | When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these |
| 2919 | is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start |
| 2920 | patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for |
| 2921 | the end patterns. |
| 2922 | |
| 2923 | The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern. |
| 2924 | Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the |
| 2925 | end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern. |
| 2926 | |
| 2927 | The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the |
| 2928 | search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what |
| 2929 | you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in |
| 2930 | the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble. |
| 2931 | |
| 2932 | Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start |
| 2933 | pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT |
| 2934 | work: > |
| 2935 | :syn region First start="(" end=":" |
| 2936 | :syn region Second start="(" end=";" |
| 2937 | < The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has |
| 2938 | higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next |
| 2939 | ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: > |
| 2940 | :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:" |
| 2941 | :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};" |
| 2942 | < This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and |
| 2943 | repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible). |
| 2944 | |
| 2945 | *:syn-keepend* |
| 2946 | By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern. |
| 2947 | This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with |
| 2948 | "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}" |
| 2949 | will then end the contained region, but not the outer region: |
| 2950 | { starts outer "{}" region |
| 2951 | { starts contained "{}" region |
| 2952 | } ends contained "{}" region |
| 2953 | } ends outer "{} region |
| 2954 | If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching |
| 2955 | of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item. |
| 2956 | This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for |
| 2957 | contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing |
| 2958 | that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: > |
| 2959 | :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+ |
| 2960 | :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend |
| 2961 | < The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line, |
| 2962 | even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>. |
| 2963 | |
| 2964 | When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried |
| 2965 | after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first |
| 2966 | encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any |
| 2967 | contained matches. |
| 2968 | *:syn-extend* |
| 2969 | The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument. |
| 2970 | When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses |
| 2971 | "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be |
| 2972 | extended. |
| 2973 | This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while |
| 2974 | others don't. Example: > |
| 2975 | |
| 2976 | :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript |
| 2977 | :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained |
| 2978 | :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend |
| 2979 | |
| 2980 | < Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue |
| 2981 | further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript |
| 2982 | item does extend the htmlRef item. |
| 2983 | |
| 2984 | Another example: > |
| 2985 | :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend |
| 2986 | < This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be |
| 2987 | changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to |
| 2988 | highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it |
| 2989 | includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested |
| 2990 | region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in. |
| 2991 | |
| 2992 | *:syn-excludenl* |
| 2993 | When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$' |
| 2994 | to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is |
| 2995 | contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with |
| 2996 | "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue |
| 2997 | that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default |
| 2998 | behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it: |
| 2999 | 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all |
| 3000 | contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be |
| 3001 | used when all contained items must not extend the containing item. |
| 3002 | 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match |
| 3003 | from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if |
| 3004 | only some contained items must not extend the containing item. |
| 3005 | "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to. |
| 3006 | |
| 3007 | *:syn-matchgroup* |
| 3008 | "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern |
| 3009 | differently than the body of the region. Example: > |
| 3010 | :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+ |
| 3011 | < This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in |
| 3012 | between with the "String" group. |
| 3013 | The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow, |
| 3014 | until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not |
| 3015 | using a matchgroup. |
| 3016 | |
| 3017 | In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the |
| 3018 | contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid |
| 3019 | that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When |
| 3020 | using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern |
| 3021 | match that is highlighted with "matchgroup". |
| 3022 | |
| 3023 | Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in |
| 3024 | different colors: > |
| 3025 | :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2 |
| 3026 | :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained |
| 3027 | :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained |
| 3028 | :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red |
| 3029 | :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue |
| 3030 | :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen |
| 3031 | |
| 3032 | ============================================================================== |
| 3033 | 6. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments* |
| 3034 | |
| 3035 | The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments. |
| 3036 | The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order |
| 3037 | and may be mixed with patterns. |
| 3038 | |
| 3039 | Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments |
| 3040 | can not be used for all commands: |
| 3041 | *E395* *E396* |
| 3042 | contains oneline fold display extend ~ |
| 3043 | :syntax keyword - - - - - |
| 3044 | :syntax match yes - yes yes yes |
| 3045 | :syntax region yes yes yes yes yes |
| 3046 | |
| 3047 | These arguments can be used for all three commands: |
| 3048 | contained |
| 3049 | containedin |
| 3050 | nextgroup |
| 3051 | transparent |
| 3052 | skipwhite |
| 3053 | skipnl |
| 3054 | skipempty |
| 3055 | |
| 3056 | |
| 3057 | contained *:syn-contained* |
| 3058 | |
| 3059 | When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at |
| 3060 | the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of |
| 3061 | another match. Example: > |
| 3062 | :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained |
| 3063 | :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo |
| 3064 | |
| 3065 | |
| 3066 | display *:syn-display* |
| 3067 | |
| 3068 | If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the |
| 3069 | detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting, |
| 3070 | by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is |
| 3071 | to be displayed. |
| 3072 | |
| 3073 | Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these |
| 3074 | conditions: |
| 3075 | - The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region |
| 3076 | for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next |
| 3077 | line. |
| 3078 | - The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or |
| 3079 | make it continue on the next line. |
| 3080 | - The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example |
| 3081 | for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display", |
| 3082 | because it may make that preprocessor match shorter. |
| 3083 | - The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise, |
| 3084 | and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a |
| 3085 | "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would |
| 3086 | match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line. |
| 3087 | |
| 3088 | Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used: |
| 3089 | - match with a number |
| 3090 | - match with a label |
| 3091 | |
| 3092 | |
| 3093 | transparent *:syn-transparent* |
| 3094 | |
| 3095 | If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted |
| 3096 | itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This |
| 3097 | is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used |
| 3098 | only to skip over a part of the text. |
| 3099 | |
| 3100 | The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in, |
| 3101 | unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To |
| 3102 | avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which |
| 3103 | highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": > |
| 3104 | :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim |
| 3105 | :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained |
| 3106 | :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE |
| 3107 | :hi link myString String |
| 3108 | :hi link myWord Comment |
| 3109 | Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last |
| 3110 | match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent" |
| 3111 | argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But |
| 3112 | it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left |
| 3113 | out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow |
| 3114 | "myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant. This |
| 3115 | happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same |
| 3116 | position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here. |
| 3117 | |
| 3118 | When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained |
| 3119 | items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you |
| 3120 | see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look |
| 3121 | through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture: |
| 3122 | |
| 3123 | look from here |
| 3124 | |
| 3125 | | | | | | | |
| 3126 | V V V V V V |
| 3127 | |
| 3128 | xxxx yyy more contained items |
| 3129 | .................... contained item (transparent) |
| 3130 | ============================= first item |
| 3131 | |
| 3132 | The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a |
| 3133 | transparent group. |
| 3134 | |
| 3135 | What you see is: |
| 3136 | |
| 3137 | =======xxxx=======yyy======== |
| 3138 | |
| 3139 | Thus you look through the transparent "....". |
| 3140 | |
| 3141 | |
| 3142 | oneline *:syn-oneline* |
| 3143 | |
| 3144 | The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line |
| 3145 | boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the |
| 3146 | region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on |
| 3147 | the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line |
| 3148 | continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first |
| 3149 | line, otherwise the region doesn't even start. |
| 3150 | |
| 3151 | When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end |
| 3152 | pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The |
| 3153 | end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument |
| 3154 | means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must |
| 3155 | be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a |
| 3156 | line break. |
| 3157 | |
| 3158 | |
| 3159 | fold *:syn-fold* |
| 3160 | |
| 3161 | The "fold" argument makes the fold level increased by one for this item. |
| 3162 | Example: > |
| 3163 | :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold |
| 3164 | :syn sync fromstart |
| 3165 | :set foldmethod=syntax |
| 3166 | This will make each {} block form one fold. |
| 3167 | |
| 3168 | The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item |
| 3169 | ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold. |
| 3170 | The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds. |
| 3171 | {not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature} |
| 3172 | |
| 3173 | |
| 3174 | *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409* |
| 3175 | contains={groupname},.. |
| 3176 | |
| 3177 | The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These |
| 3178 | groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the |
| 3179 | containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and |
| 3180 | regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in |
| 3181 | this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used |
| 3182 | here. |
| 3183 | |
| 3184 | contains=ALL |
| 3185 | If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all |
| 3186 | groups will be accepted inside the item. |
| 3187 | |
| 3188 | contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},.. |
| 3189 | If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all |
| 3190 | groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that |
| 3191 | are listed. Example: > |
| 3192 | :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function |
| 3193 | |
| 3194 | contains=TOP |
| 3195 | If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all |
| 3196 | groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained" |
| 3197 | argument. |
| 3198 | contains=TOP,{group-name},.. |
| 3199 | Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed. |
| 3200 | |
| 3201 | contains=CONTAINED |
| 3202 | If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then |
| 3203 | all groups will be accepted that have the "contained" |
| 3204 | argument. |
| 3205 | contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},.. |
| 3206 | Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are |
| 3207 | listed. |
| 3208 | |
| 3209 | |
| 3210 | The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names |
| 3211 | that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used). |
| 3212 | The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: > |
| 3213 | ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3] |
| 3214 | The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups |
| 3215 | that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax |
| 3216 | command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting |
| 3217 | syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because |
| 3218 | the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the |
| 3219 | group names. |
| 3220 | |
| 3221 | The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a |
| 3222 | region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used |
| 3223 | |:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the |
| 3224 | region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the |
| 3225 | area that is highlighted |
| 3226 | |
| 3227 | |
| 3228 | containedin={groupname}... *:syn-containedin* |
| 3229 | |
| 3230 | The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The |
| 3231 | item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the |
| 3232 | containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item. |
| 3233 | |
| 3234 | The {groupname}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above. |
| 3235 | |
| 3236 | This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to |
| 3237 | be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition |
| 3238 | of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading |
| 3239 | the C syntax: > |
| 3240 | :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained |
| 3241 | Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top |
| 3242 | level. |
| 3243 | |
| 3244 | Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can |
| 3245 | appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that |
| 3246 | keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't |
| 3247 | work. |
| 3248 | |
| 3249 | |
| 3250 | nextgroup={groupname},.. *:syn-nextgroup* |
| 3251 | |
| 3252 | The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names, |
| 3253 | separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns). |
| 3254 | |
| 3255 | If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be |
| 3256 | tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have |
| 3257 | a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group |
| 3258 | will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the |
| 3259 | current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all |
| 3260 | other groups. Example: > |
| 3261 | :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo |
| 3262 | :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller |
| 3263 | :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained |
| 3264 | |
| 3265 | This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a |
| 3266 | "Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for |
| 3267 | highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. > |
| 3268 | |
| 3269 | Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf |
| 3270 | fff bbb fff bbb |
| 3271 | |
| 3272 | Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar. |
| 3273 | when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be |
| 3274 | highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match |
| 3275 | would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|). |
| 3276 | |
| 3277 | |
| 3278 | skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite* |
| 3279 | skipnl *:syn-skipnl* |
| 3280 | skipempty *:syn-skipempty* |
| 3281 | |
| 3282 | These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be |
| 3283 | used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text: |
Bram Moolenaar | dd2a0d8 | 2007-05-12 15:07:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3284 | skipwhite skip over space and tab characters |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3285 | skipnl skip over the end of a line |
| 3286 | skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl") |
| 3287 | |
| 3288 | When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no |
| 3289 | next group that matches the white space. |
| 3290 | |
| 3291 | When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next |
| 3292 | line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current |
| 3293 | line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after |
| 3294 | the current item in the same line. |
| 3295 | |
| 3296 | When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other |
| 3297 | groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried |
| 3298 | for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white |
| 3299 | space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items. |
| 3300 | |
| 3301 | Example: > |
| 3302 | :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty |
| 3303 | :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained |
| 3304 | :syn match ifline "endif" contained |
| 3305 | Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also |
| 3306 | match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes |
| 3307 | precedence. |
| 3308 | Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add |
| 3309 | "contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the |
| 3310 | example). |
| 3311 | |
| 3312 | ============================================================================== |
| 3313 | 7. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402* |
| 3314 | |
| 3315 | In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical |
| 3316 | characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to |
| 3317 | use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can |
| 3318 | use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: > |
| 3319 | :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/" |
| 3320 | :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+ |
| 3321 | |
| 3322 | See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are |
| 3323 | always interpreted like the 'magic' options is set, no matter what the actual |
| 3324 | value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is |
| 3325 | not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and |
| 3326 | independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings. |
| 3327 | |
| 3328 | Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*". |
| 3329 | This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere. |
| 3330 | |
| 3331 | *:syn-pattern-offset* |
| 3332 | The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to |
| 3333 | change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the |
| 3334 | match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both |
| 3335 | are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip |
| 3336 | pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern. |
| 3337 | |
| 3338 | The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}" |
| 3339 | The {what} can be one of seven strings: |
| 3340 | |
| 3341 | ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text |
| 3342 | me Match End offset for the end of the matched text |
| 3343 | hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts |
| 3344 | he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends |
| 3345 | rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts |
| 3346 | re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends |
| 3347 | lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern |
| 3348 | |
| 3349 | The {offset} can be: |
| 3350 | |
| 3351 | s start of the matched pattern |
| 3352 | s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right |
| 3353 | s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left |
| 3354 | e end of the matched pattern |
| 3355 | e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right |
| 3356 | e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left |
| 3357 | {nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars to the left |
| 3358 | |
| 3359 | Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3". |
| 3360 | |
| 3361 | Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always |
| 3362 | meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used: |
| 3363 | |
| 3364 | ms me hs he rs re lc ~ |
| 3365 | match item yes yes yes yes - - yes |
| 3366 | region item start yes - yes - yes - yes |
| 3367 | region item skip - yes - - - - yes |
| 3368 | region item end - yes - yes - yes yes |
| 3369 | |
| 3370 | Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: > |
| 3371 | :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1 |
| 3372 | < |
| 3373 | some "string" text |
| 3374 | ^^^^^^ highlighted |
| 3375 | |
| 3376 | Notes: |
| 3377 | - There must be no white space between the pattern and the character |
| 3378 | offset(s). |
| 3379 | - The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text. |
| 3380 | - A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end |
| 3381 | pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped. |
| 3382 | - The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern |
| 3383 | matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting |
| 3384 | start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e. |
| 3385 | |
| 3386 | Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): > |
| 3387 | :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1 |
| 3388 | < |
| 3389 | /* this is a comment */ |
| 3390 | ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted |
| 3391 | |
| 3392 | A more complicated Example: > |
| 3393 | :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1 |
| 3394 | < |
| 3395 | abcfoostringbarabc |
| 3396 | mmmmmmmmmmm match |
Bram Moolenaar | 4770d09 | 2006-01-12 23:22:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3397 | sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar") |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3398 | |
| 3399 | Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context* |
| 3400 | |
| 3401 | Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility |
| 3402 | with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct |
| 3403 | in the pattern. |
| 3404 | |
| 3405 | The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must |
| 3406 | be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will |
| 3407 | cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing |
| 3408 | characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be |
| 3409 | used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to |
| 3410 | specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: > |
| 3411 | |
| 3412 | :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1 |
| 3413 | :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1 |
| 3414 | :syn match Underline "_\+" |
| 3415 | < |
| 3416 | ___zzzz ___wwww |
| 3417 | ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline |
| 3418 | ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash |
| 3419 | ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash |
| 3420 | |
| 3421 | The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset, |
| 3422 | unless you set "ms" explicitly. |
| 3423 | |
| 3424 | |
| 3425 | Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line* |
| 3426 | |
| 3427 | The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as |
| 3428 | expected, but there are a few exceptions. |
| 3429 | |
| 3430 | When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not |
| 3431 | allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a |
| 3432 | following line though. |
| 3433 | |
| 3434 | The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will |
| 3435 | continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is |
| 3436 | matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line |
| 3437 | halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a |
| 3438 | previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern |
| 3439 | is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: > |
| 3440 | x x a |
| 3441 | b x x |
| 3442 | Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters |
| 3443 | after the "\n". |
| 3444 | |
| 3445 | |
| 3446 | External matches *:syn-ext-match* |
| 3447 | |
| 3448 | These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns: |
| 3449 | |
| 3450 | */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* |
| 3451 | \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it is can |
| 3452 | be accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable |
| 3453 | in defining a syntax region start pattern. |
| 3454 | |
| 3455 | */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5* |
| 3456 | \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67* |
| 3457 | Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding |
| 3458 | sub-expression in a previous start pattern match. |
| 3459 | |
| 3460 | Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common |
| 3461 | sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix |
| 3462 | shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression |
| 3463 | items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be |
| 3464 | referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document |
| 3465 | example, for instance, can be done like this: > |
| 3466 | :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$" |
| 3467 | |
| 3468 | As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern, |
| 3469 | it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it |
| 3470 | changes the \1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the |
| 3471 | first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can |
| 3472 | also be used in skip patterns: > |
| 3473 | :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1" |
| 3474 | |
| 3475 | Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and |
| 3476 | indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied |
| 3477 | to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa". |
| 3478 | Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references |
| 3479 | within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one |
| 3480 | sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest |
| 3481 | the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)". |
| 3482 | |
| 3483 | Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches |
| 3484 | cannot be referred to. |
| 3485 | |
| 3486 | ============================================================================== |
| 3487 | 8. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400* |
| 3488 | |
| 3489 | :sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..] |
| 3490 | [add={group-name}..] |
| 3491 | [remove={group-name}..] |
| 3492 | |
| 3493 | This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a |
| 3494 | single name. |
| 3495 | |
| 3496 | contains={group-name}.. |
| 3497 | The cluster is set to the specified list of groups. |
| 3498 | add={group-name}.. |
| 3499 | The specified groups are added to the cluster. |
| 3500 | remove={group-name}.. |
| 3501 | The specified groups are removed from the cluster. |
| 3502 | |
| 3503 | A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., nextgroup=.., add=.. |
| 3504 | or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use this notation to |
| 3505 | implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents. |
| 3506 | |
| 3507 | Example: > |
| 3508 | :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers |
| 3509 | :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2 |
| 3510 | |
| 3511 | As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively |
| 3512 | retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so |
| 3513 | to speak: > |
| 3514 | :syntax keyword A aaa |
| 3515 | :syntax keyword B bbb |
| 3516 | :syntax cluster AandB contains=A |
| 3517 | :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB |
| 3518 | :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff |
| 3519 | |
| 3520 | This also has implications for nested clusters: > |
| 3521 | :syntax keyword A aaa |
| 3522 | :syntax keyword B bbb |
| 3523 | :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B |
| 3524 | :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup |
| 3525 | :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup |
| 3526 | :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup |
| 3527 | :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff |
| 3528 | |
| 3529 | ============================================================================== |
| 3530 | 9. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397* |
| 3531 | |
| 3532 | It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for |
| 3533 | a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in |
| 3534 | two different ways: |
| 3535 | |
| 3536 | - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be |
| 3537 | allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use |
| 3538 | the |:runtime| command: > |
| 3539 | |
| 3540 | " In cpp.vim: |
| 3541 | :runtime! syntax/c.vim |
| 3542 | :unlet b:current_syntax |
| 3543 | |
| 3544 | < - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be |
| 3545 | contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the |
| 3546 | ":syntax include" command: |
| 3547 | |
| 3548 | :sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name} |
| 3549 | |
| 3550 | All syntax items declared in the included file will have the |
| 3551 | "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified, |
| 3552 | all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to |
| 3553 | that list. > |
| 3554 | |
| 3555 | " In perl.vim: |
| 3556 | :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim |
| 3557 | :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod |
| 3558 | < |
| 3559 | When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR" |
| 3560 | or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path |
| 3561 | (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'. |
| 3562 | All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is |
| 3563 | recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file |
| 3564 | with his own version, without replacing the file that does the ":syn |
| 3565 | include". |
| 3566 | |
| 3567 | ============================================================================== |
| 3568 | 10. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404* |
| 3569 | |
| 3570 | Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To |
| 3571 | make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where |
| 3572 | redrawing starts. |
| 3573 | |
| 3574 | :sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...] |
| 3575 | |
| 3576 | There are four ways to synchronize: |
| 3577 | 1. Always parse from the start of the file. |
| 3578 | |:syn-sync-first| |
| 3579 | 2. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can |
| 3580 | figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment. |
| 3581 | |:syn-sync-second| |
| 3582 | 3. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there. |
| 3583 | |:syn-sync-third| |
| 3584 | 4. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on. |
| 3585 | |:syn-sync-fourth| |
| 3586 | |
| 3587 | *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines* |
| 3588 | For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is |
| 3589 | limited by "minlines" and "maxlines". |
| 3590 | |
| 3591 | If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least |
| 3592 | that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few |
| 3593 | lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing. |
| 3594 | |
| 3595 | If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched |
| 3596 | for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after |
| 3597 | adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a |
| 3598 | slow machine. Example: > |
| 3599 | :syntax sync ccomment maxlines=500 |
| 3600 | < |
| 3601 | *:syn-sync-linebreaks* |
| 3602 | When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may |
| 3603 | cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to |
| 3604 | start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with |
| 3605 | the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line |
| 3606 | break use this: > |
| 3607 | :syntax sync linebreaks=1 |
| 3608 | The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a |
| 3609 | change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the |
| 3610 | value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks". |
| 3611 | |
| 3612 | |
| 3613 | First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first* |
| 3614 | > |
| 3615 | :syntax sync fromstart |
| 3616 | |
| 3617 | The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting |
| 3618 | accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text, |
| 3619 | so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However, |
| 3620 | when making changes some part of the next needs to be parsed again (worst |
| 3621 | case: to the end of the file). |
| 3622 | |
| 3623 | Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number. |
| 3624 | |
| 3625 | |
| 3626 | Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment* |
| 3627 | |
| 3628 | For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given. |
| 3629 | Example: > |
| 3630 | :syntax sync ccomment |
| 3631 | |
| 3632 | When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style |
| 3633 | comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be |
| 3634 | used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"! |
| 3635 | An alternate group name can be specified, for example: > |
| 3636 | :syntax sync ccomment javaComment |
| 3637 | This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be |
| 3638 | used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that |
| 3639 | region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/". |
| 3640 | |
| 3641 | The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of |
| 3642 | lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of |
| 3643 | lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few |
| 3644 | lines, but it hard to sync on). |
| 3645 | |
| 3646 | Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used |
| 3647 | that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line |
| 3648 | is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the |
| 3649 | chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction |
| 3650 | is hardly ever noticed. |
| 3651 | |
| 3652 | |
| 3653 | Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third* |
| 3654 | |
| 3655 | For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given. |
| 3656 | Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This |
| 3657 | means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower. |
| 3658 | Example: > |
| 3659 | :syntax sync minlines=50 |
| 3660 | |
| 3661 | "lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions). |
| 3662 | |
| 3663 | |
| 3664 | Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth* |
| 3665 | |
| 3666 | The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a |
| 3667 | sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some |
| 3668 | region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search |
| 3669 | starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there |
| 3670 | the search continues backwards in the file. |
| 3671 | |
| 3672 | This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained |
| 3673 | matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences: |
| 3674 | - Keywords cannot be used. |
| 3675 | - The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group |
| 3676 | of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups. |
| 3677 | - The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of |
| 3678 | forwards. |
| 3679 | - A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group |
| 3680 | of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the |
| 3681 | search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the |
| 3682 | consecutive that contain the continuation pattern. |
| 3683 | - When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or |
| 3684 | group of continued lines). |
| 3685 | - When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of |
| 3686 | continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the |
| 3687 | line (or group of continued lines). |
| 3688 | - When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of |
| 3689 | continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used. |
| 3690 | This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region |
| 3691 | (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used). |
| 3692 | |
| 3693 | There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used: |
| 3694 | 1. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the |
| 3695 | search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected |
| 3696 | to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions |
| 3697 | that cross lines cannot contain other regions. |
| 3698 | 2. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group |
| 3699 | that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified. |
| 3700 | This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much |
| 3701 | slower, because more text needs to be parsed. |
| 3702 | Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time. |
| 3703 | |
| 3704 | Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to |
| 3705 | avoid finding unwanted matches. |
| 3706 | |
| 3707 | [The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the |
| 3708 | search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the |
| 3709 | highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much) |
| 3710 | faster.] |
| 3711 | |
| 3712 | *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394* |
| 3713 | :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" .. |
| 3714 | |
| 3715 | Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the |
| 3716 | name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing |
| 3717 | of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region |
| 3718 | must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used. |
| 3719 | "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match. |
| 3720 | |
| 3721 | *syn-sync-groupthere* |
| 3722 | :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" .. |
| 3723 | |
| 3724 | Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that |
| 3725 | is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync |
| 3726 | point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync |
| 3727 | pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting. |
| 3728 | For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If |
| 3729 | "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the |
| 3730 | "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you |
| 3731 | are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice |
| 3732 | it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear |
| 3733 | inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...). |
| 3734 | |
| 3735 | :syntax sync match .. |
| 3736 | :syntax sync region .. |
| 3737 | |
| 3738 | Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is |
| 3739 | skipped while searching for a sync point. |
| 3740 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3741 | *syn-sync-linecont* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3742 | :syntax sync linecont {pattern} |
| 3743 | |
| 3744 | When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in |
| 3745 | the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will |
| 3746 | consider the lines to be concatenated. |
| 3747 | |
| 3748 | If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are |
| 3749 | searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very |
| 3750 | few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: > |
| 3751 | :syntax sync maxlines=100 |
| 3752 | |
| 3753 | You can clear all sync settings with: > |
| 3754 | :syntax sync clear |
| 3755 | |
| 3756 | You can clear specific sync patterns with: > |
| 3757 | :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} .. |
| 3758 | |
| 3759 | ============================================================================== |
| 3760 | 11. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list* |
| 3761 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 482aaeb | 2005-09-29 18:26:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3762 | This command lists all the syntax items: > |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3763 | |
| 3764 | :sy[ntax] [list] |
| 3765 | |
| 3766 | To show the syntax items for one syntax group: > |
| 3767 | |
| 3768 | :sy[ntax] list {group-name} |
| 3769 | |
| 3770 | To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* > |
| 3771 | |
| 3772 | :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name} |
| 3773 | |
| 3774 | See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command. |
| 3775 | |
| 3776 | Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn" |
| 3777 | is mostly used, because it looks better. |
| 3778 | |
| 3779 | ============================================================================== |
| 3780 | 12. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415* |
| 3781 | |
| 3782 | There are three types of highlight groups: |
| 3783 | - The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the |
| 3784 | name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are |
| 3785 | linked to a group of the second type. |
| 3786 | - The ones used for all syntax languages. |
| 3787 | - The ones used for the 'highlight' option. |
| 3788 | *hitest.vim* |
| 3789 | You can see all the groups currently active with this command: > |
| 3790 | :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim |
| 3791 | This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed |
| 3792 | in their own color. |
| 3793 | |
| 3794 | *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185* |
| 3795 | :colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath' |
| 3796 | for the file "colors/{name}.vim. The first one that |
| 3797 | is found is loaded. |
| 3798 | To see the name of the currently active color scheme |
| 3799 | (if there is one): > |
| 3800 | :echo g:colors_name |
| 3801 | < Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use |
| 3802 | ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script. |
Bram Moolenaar | cfbc5ee | 2004-07-02 15:38:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3803 | After the color scheme has been loaded the |
| 3804 | |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered. |
Bram Moolenaar | d4755bb | 2004-09-02 19:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3805 | For info about writing a colorscheme file: > |
| 3806 | :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3807 | |
| 3808 | :hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have |
| 3809 | attributes set. |
| 3810 | |
| 3811 | :hi[ghlight] {group-name} |
| 3812 | List one highlight group. |
| 3813 | |
| 3814 | :hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all |
| 3815 | highlighting for groups added by the user! |
| 3816 | Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which |
| 3817 | default colors to use. |
| 3818 | |
| 3819 | :hi[ghlight] clear {group-name} |
| 3820 | :hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE |
| 3821 | Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It |
| 3822 | is _not_ set back to the default colors. |
| 3823 | |
| 3824 | :hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} .. |
| 3825 | Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for |
| 3826 | an existing group. |
| 3827 | See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments. |
| 3828 | See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default] |
| 3829 | argument. |
| 3830 | |
| 3831 | Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the |
| 3832 | default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional |
| 3833 | highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default |
| 3834 | values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to |
| 3835 | the default value. |
| 3836 | |
| 3837 | A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads |
| 3838 | a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: > |
| 3839 | |
| 3840 | :hi Comment gui=bold |
| 3841 | |
| 3842 | Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the |
| 3843 | specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the |
| 3844 | result is like this single command has been used: > |
| 3845 | :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold |
| 3846 | < |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3847 | *:highlight-verbose* |
Bram Moolenaar | 661b182 | 2005-07-28 22:36:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3848 | When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will |
| 3849 | also tell where it was last set. Example: > |
| 3850 | :verbose hi Comment |
| 3851 | < Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | c9b4b05 | 2006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3852 | Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~ |
Bram Moolenaar | 661b182 | 2005-07-28 22:36:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3853 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 8aff23a | 2005-08-19 20:40:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3854 | When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be |
| 3855 | mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information. |
Bram Moolenaar | 661b182 | 2005-07-28 22:36:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3856 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3857 | *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423* |
| 3858 | There are three types of terminals for highlighting: |
| 3859 | term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm) |
| 3860 | cterm a color terminal (MS-DOS console, color-xterm, these have the "Co" |
| 3861 | termcap entry) |
| 3862 | gui the GUI |
| 3863 | |
| 3864 | For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use |
| 3865 | the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting. |
| 3866 | |
| 3867 | 1. highlight arguments for normal terminals |
| 3868 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 75c50c4 | 2005-06-04 22:06:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3869 | *bold* *underline* *undercurl* |
| 3870 | *inverse* *italic* *standout* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3871 | term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418* |
| 3872 | attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the |
| 3873 | following items (in any order): |
| 3874 | bold |
| 3875 | underline |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3876 | undercurl not always available |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3877 | reverse |
| 3878 | inverse same as reverse |
| 3879 | italic |
| 3880 | standout |
| 3881 | NONE no attributes used (used to reset it) |
| 3882 | |
| 3883 | Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They |
| 3884 | have the same effect. |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3885 | "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible |
| 3886 | then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" is only available in |
Bram Moolenaar | 910f66f | 2006-04-05 20:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3887 | the GUI. The color is set with |highlight-guisp|. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3888 | |
| 3889 | start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422* |
| 3890 | stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop* |
| 3891 | These lists of terminal codes can be used to get |
| 3892 | non-standard attributes on a terminal. |
| 3893 | |
| 3894 | The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument |
| 3895 | is written before the characters in the highlighted |
| 3896 | area. It can be anything that you want to send to the |
| 3897 | terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence |
| 3898 | specified with the "stop" argument is written after the |
| 3899 | highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument. |
| 3900 | Otherwise the screen will look messed up. |
| 3901 | |
| 3902 | The {term-list} can have two forms: |
| 3903 | |
| 3904 | 1. A string with escape sequences. |
| 3905 | This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with |
| 3906 | "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized |
| 3907 | here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example: |
| 3908 | start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r; |
| 3909 | |
| 3910 | 2. A list of terminal codes. |
| 3911 | Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of |
| 3912 | the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas. |
| 3913 | White space is not allowed. Example: |
| 3914 | start=t_C1,t_BL |
| 3915 | The terminal codes must exist for this to work. |
| 3916 | |
| 3917 | |
| 3918 | 2. highlight arguments for color terminals |
| 3919 | |
| 3920 | cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm* |
| 3921 | See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|. |
| 3922 | The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when |
| 3923 | colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could |
| 3924 | be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue. |
| 3925 | Note: Many terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes |
| 3926 | with coloring. Use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg=" OR "ctermbg=". |
| 3927 | |
| 3928 | ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421* |
| 3929 | ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg* |
| 3930 | The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to |
| 3931 | (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co". |
| 3932 | The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal |
| 3933 | and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of |
| 3934 | "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives |
| 3935 | another color, on others you just get color 3. |
| 3936 | |
| 3937 | For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit |
| 3938 | unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The |
| 3939 | colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file. |
| 3940 | Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors |
| 3941 | for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms. |
| 3942 | |
| 3943 | The MSDOS standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so these |
| 3944 | have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in X11 |
| 3945 | are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the |
| 3946 | highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The |
| 3947 | following names are recognized, with the color number used: |
| 3948 | |
| 3949 | *cterm-colors* |
| 3950 | NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~ |
| 3951 | 0 0 Black |
| 3952 | 1 4 DarkBlue |
| 3953 | 2 2 DarkGreen |
| 3954 | 3 6 DarkCyan |
| 3955 | 4 1 DarkRed |
| 3956 | 5 5 DarkMagenta |
| 3957 | 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow |
| 3958 | 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey |
| 3959 | 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey |
| 3960 | 9 4* Blue, LightBlue |
| 3961 | 10 2* Green, LightGreen |
| 3962 | 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan |
| 3963 | 12 1* Red, LightRed |
| 3964 | 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta |
| 3965 | 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow |
| 3966 | 15 7* White |
| 3967 | |
| 3968 | The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co' |
| 3969 | greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for |
| 3970 | 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the |
| 3971 | bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g., |
| 3972 | "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work |
| 3973 | for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed. |
| 3974 | If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a |
| 3975 | "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use |
| 3976 | a number instead of a color name. |
| 3977 | |
| 3978 | The case of the color names is ignored. |
| 3979 | Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3980 | numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3981 | is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc. |
| 3982 | |
| 3983 | Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong |
| 3984 | colors! |
| 3985 | |
| 3986 | *:hi-normal-cterm* |
| 3987 | When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group, |
| 3988 | these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text. |
| 3989 | Example: > |
| 3990 | :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue |
| 3991 | < When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the |
| 3992 | 'background' option will be adjusted automatically. This causes the |
| 3993 | highlight groups that depend on 'background' to change! This means |
| 3994 | you should set the colors for Normal first, before setting other |
| 3995 | colors. |
| 3996 | When a colorscheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to |
| 3997 | be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First |
| 3998 | delete the "colors_name" variable when you don't want this. |
| 3999 | |
| 4000 | When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim |
| 4001 | needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op" |
| 4002 | termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the |
| 4003 | 't_op' option in your .vimrc. |
| 4004 | *E419* *E420* |
| 4005 | When Vim knows the normal foreground and background colors, "fg" and |
| 4006 | "bg" can be used as color names. This only works after setting the |
| 4007 | colors for the Normal group and for the MS-DOS console. Example, for |
| 4008 | reverse video: > |
| 4009 | :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg |
| 4010 | < Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this |
| 4011 | command are given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the |
| 4012 | "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted. |
| 4013 | |
| 4014 | |
| 4015 | 3. highlight arguments for the GUI |
| 4016 | |
| 4017 | gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui* |
| 4018 | These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode. |
| 4019 | See |attr-list| for a description. |
| 4020 | Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They |
| 4021 | have the same effect. |
| 4022 | Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group. |
| 4023 | |
| 4024 | font={font-name} *highlight-font* |
| 4025 | font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim |
| 4026 | runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: > |
| 4027 | font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1 |
| 4028 | < |
| 4029 | The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font. |
| 4030 | When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default |
| 4031 | font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is |
| 4032 | used). |
| 4033 | The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs: |
| 4034 | When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed. |
| 4035 | When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be |
| 4036 | changed. |
| 4037 | All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same |
| 4038 | character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will |
| 4039 | occur. |
| 4040 | |
| 4041 | guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg* |
| 4042 | guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg* |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4043 | guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp* |
| 4044 | These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special |
Bram Moolenaar | 7df351e | 2006-01-23 22:30:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4045 | (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl. |
| 4046 | There are a few special names: |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4047 | NONE no color (transparent) |
| 4048 | bg use normal background color |
| 4049 | background use normal background color |
| 4050 | fg use normal foreground color |
| 4051 | foreground use normal foreground color |
| 4052 | To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character, |
| 4053 | put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then. |
| 4054 | Example: > |
| 4055 | :hi comment guifg='salmon pink' |
| 4056 | < |
| 4057 | *gui-colors* |
| 4058 | Suggested color names (these are available on most systems): |
| 4059 | Red LightRed DarkRed |
| 4060 | Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen |
| 4061 | Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue |
| 4062 | Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan |
| 4063 | Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta |
| 4064 | Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow |
| 4065 | Gray LightGray DarkGray |
| 4066 | Black White |
| 4067 | Orange Purple Violet |
| 4068 | |
| 4069 | In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See |
| 4070 | |win32-colors|. |
| 4071 | |
| 4072 | You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values. |
| 4073 | The format is "#rrggbb", where |
| 4074 | "rr" is the Red value |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4075 | "gg" is the Green value |
Bram Moolenaar | 5409c05 | 2005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4076 | "bb" is the Blue value |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4077 | All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: > |
| 4078 | :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff |
| 4079 | < |
| 4080 | *highlight-groups* *highlight-default* |
| 4081 | These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the |
| 4082 | 'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value |
| 4083 | of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight" |
| 4084 | command. |
| 4085 | *hl-Cursor* |
| 4086 | Cursor the character under the cursor |
| 4087 | *hl-CursorIM* |
| 4088 | CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM| |
Bram Moolenaar | 5316eee | 2006-03-12 22:11:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4089 | *hl-CursorColumn* |
| 4090 | CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is |
| 4091 | set |
| 4092 | *hl-CursorLine* |
| 4093 | CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is |
| 4094 | set |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4095 | *hl-Directory* |
| 4096 | Directory directory names (and other special names in listings) |
| 4097 | *hl-DiffAdd* |
| 4098 | DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt| |
| 4099 | *hl-DiffChange* |
| 4100 | DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt| |
| 4101 | *hl-DiffDelete* |
| 4102 | DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt| |
| 4103 | *hl-DiffText* |
| 4104 | DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt| |
| 4105 | *hl-ErrorMsg* |
| 4106 | ErrorMsg error messages on the command line |
| 4107 | *hl-VertSplit* |
| 4108 | VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows |
| 4109 | *hl-Folded* |
| 4110 | Folded line used for closed folds |
| 4111 | *hl-FoldColumn* |
| 4112 | FoldColumn 'foldcolumn' |
| 4113 | *hl-SignColumn* |
| 4114 | SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed |
| 4115 | *hl-IncSearch* |
| 4116 | IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with |
| 4117 | ":s///c" |
| 4118 | *hl-LineNr* |
Bram Moolenaar | fd2ac76 | 2006-03-01 22:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4119 | LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number' |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4120 | option is set. |
Bram Moolenaar | fd2ac76 | 2006-03-01 22:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4121 | *hl-MatchParen* |
| 4122 | MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it |
| 4123 | is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt| |
| 4124 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4125 | *hl-ModeMsg* |
| 4126 | ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --") |
| 4127 | *hl-MoreMsg* |
| 4128 | MoreMsg |more-prompt| |
| 4129 | *hl-NonText* |
| 4130 | NonText '~' and '@' at the end of the window, characters from |
| 4131 | 'showbreak' and other characters that do not really exist in |
| 4132 | the text (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character |
| 4133 | doesn't fit at the end of the line). |
| 4134 | *hl-Normal* |
| 4135 | Normal normal text |
Bram Moolenaar | 1c7715d | 2005-10-03 22:02:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4136 | *hl-Pmenu* |
| 4137 | Pmenu Popup menu: normal item. |
| 4138 | *hl-PmenuSel* |
| 4139 | PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item. |
| 4140 | *hl-PmenuSbar* |
| 4141 | PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar. |
| 4142 | *hl-PmenuThumb* |
| 4143 | PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4144 | *hl-Question* |
| 4145 | Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions |
| 4146 | *hl-Search* |
| 4147 | Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch'). |
| 4148 | Also used for highlighting the current line in the quickfix |
| 4149 | window and similar items that need to stand out. |
| 4150 | *hl-SpecialKey* |
| 4151 | SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used |
| 4152 | to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'. |
| 4153 | Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it |
| 4154 | really is. |
Bram Moolenaar | 217ad92 | 2005-03-20 22:37:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4155 | *hl-SpellBad* |
| 4156 | SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell| |
| 4157 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
Bram Moolenaar | 53180ce | 2005-07-05 21:48:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4158 | *hl-SpellCap* |
| 4159 | SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell| |
| 4160 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
Bram Moolenaar | 217ad92 | 2005-03-20 22:37:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4161 | *hl-SpellLocal* |
| 4162 | SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is |
| 4163 | used in another region. |spell| |
| 4164 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
| 4165 | *hl-SpellRare* |
| 4166 | SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is |
| 4167 | hardly ever used. |spell| |
| 4168 | This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4169 | *hl-StatusLine* |
| 4170 | StatusLine status line of current window |
| 4171 | *hl-StatusLineNC* |
| 4172 | StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows |
| 4173 | Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in |
| 4174 | the status line of the current window. |
Bram Moolenaar | faa959a | 2006-02-20 21:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4175 | *hl-TabLine* |
| 4176 | TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label |
| 4177 | *hl-TabLineFill* |
| 4178 | TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels |
| 4179 | *hl-TabLineSel* |
| 4180 | TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4181 | *hl-Title* |
| 4182 | Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc. |
| 4183 | *hl-Visual* |
| 4184 | Visual Visual mode selection |
| 4185 | *hl-VisualNOS* |
| 4186 | VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection". |
| 4187 | Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this. |
| 4188 | *hl-WarningMsg* |
| 4189 | WarningMsg warning messages |
| 4190 | *hl-WildMenu* |
| 4191 | WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion |
| 4192 | |
Bram Moolenaar | f75a963 | 2005-09-13 21:20:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4193 | *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9* |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4194 | The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4195 | statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9. |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4196 | |
| 4197 | For the GUI you can use these groups to set the colors for the menu, |
| 4198 | scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the |
| 4199 | Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg, |
| 4200 | and guifg. |
| 4201 | |
| 4202 | *hl-Menu* |
| 4203 | Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus. |
| 4204 | Also used for the toolbar. |
| 4205 | Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. |
| 4206 | |
| 4207 | NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually |
| 4208 | specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is |
| 4209 | empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when |
| 4210 | set. |
| 4211 | |
| 4212 | *hl-Scrollbar* |
| 4213 | Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's |
| 4214 | scrollbars. |
| 4215 | Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg. |
| 4216 | |
| 4217 | *hl-Tooltip* |
| 4218 | Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips. |
| 4219 | Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg. |
| 4220 | |
| 4221 | NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually |
| 4222 | specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is |
| 4223 | empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when |
| 4224 | set. |
| 4225 | |
| 4226 | ============================================================================== |
| 4227 | 13. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413* |
| 4228 | |
| 4229 | When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you |
| 4230 | can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight |
| 4231 | group, and give the color attributes only for that group. |
| 4232 | |
| 4233 | To set a link: |
| 4234 | |
| 4235 | :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group} |
| 4236 | |
| 4237 | To remove a link: |
| 4238 | |
| 4239 | :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE |
| 4240 | |
| 4241 | Notes: *E414* |
| 4242 | - If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You |
| 4243 | don't get an error message for a non-existing group. |
| 4244 | - As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is |
| 4245 | removed. |
| 4246 | - If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is |
| 4247 | not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a |
| 4248 | sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip |
| 4249 | links for groups that already have settings. |
| 4250 | |
| 4251 | *:hi-default* *:highlight-default* |
| 4252 | The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a |
| 4253 | group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command |
| 4254 | will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link. |
| 4255 | |
| 4256 | Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a |
| 4257 | specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: > |
| 4258 | :highlight default link cComment Comment |
| 4259 | If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: > |
| 4260 | :highlight link cComment Question |
| 4261 | Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be |
| 4262 | overruled when the syntax file is loaded. |
| 4263 | |
| 4264 | ============================================================================== |
| 4265 | 14. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391* |
| 4266 | |
| 4267 | If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this |
| 4268 | command: > |
| 4269 | :syntax clear |
| 4270 | |
| 4271 | This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting, |
| 4272 | or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed |
| 4273 | in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that |
| 4274 | load the syntax file. |
| 4275 | The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is |
| 4276 | loaded after this command. |
| 4277 | |
| 4278 | If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove |
| 4279 | the autocommands that load the syntax files: > |
| 4280 | :syntax off |
| 4281 | |
| 4282 | What this command actually does, is executing the command > |
| 4283 | :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim |
| 4284 | See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work |
| 4285 | $VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|. |
| 4286 | |
| 4287 | To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: > |
| 4288 | :syntax clear {group-name} .. |
| 4289 | This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}. |
| 4290 | |
| 4291 | To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: > |
| 4292 | :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} .. |
| 4293 | This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list. |
| 4294 | |
| 4295 | *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset* |
| 4296 | If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the |
| 4297 | defaults back: > |
| 4298 | |
| 4299 | :syntax reset |
| 4300 | |
| 4301 | This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option. |
| 4302 | |
| 4303 | Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset |
| 4304 | back to their Vim default. |
| 4305 | Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color |
| 4306 | scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost. |
| 4307 | |
| 4308 | What this actually does is: > |
| 4309 | |
| 4310 | let g:syntax_cmd = "reset" |
| 4311 | runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim |
| 4312 | |
| 4313 | Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option. |
| 4314 | |
| 4315 | *syncolor* |
| 4316 | If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim |
| 4317 | script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in |
| 4318 | 'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule |
| 4319 | the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax |
| 4320 | reset" command. |
| 4321 | |
| 4322 | For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: > |
| 4323 | |
| 4324 | if &background == "light" |
| 4325 | highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen |
| 4326 | else |
| 4327 | highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green |
| 4328 | endif |
| 4329 | |
Bram Moolenaar | c0197e2 | 2004-09-13 20:26:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4330 | *E679* |
| 4331 | Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the |
| 4332 | 'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an |
| 4333 | endless loop. |
| 4334 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4335 | Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether |
| 4336 | your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This |
| 4337 | depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|. |
| 4338 | |
| 4339 | *syntax_cmd* |
| 4340 | The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the |
| 4341 | syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded: |
| 4342 | "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but |
| 4343 | links are kept |
| 4344 | "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that |
| 4345 | don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default". |
| 4346 | "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all |
| 4347 | the colors. |
| 4348 | "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a |
| 4349 | syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set |
| 4350 | them. |
| 4351 | |
| 4352 | ============================================================================== |
| 4353 | 15. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight* |
| 4354 | |
| 4355 | If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following |
| 4356 | mappings. |
| 4357 | |
| 4358 | <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags. |
| 4359 | <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file. |
| 4360 | > |
| 4361 | :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12> |
| 4362 | :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR> |
| 4363 | |
| 4364 | WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more |
| 4365 | memory Vim will consume. |
| 4366 | |
| 4367 | Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you |
| 4368 | must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net). |
| 4369 | |
| 4370 | Put these lines in your Makefile: |
| 4371 | |
| 4372 | # Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk |
| 4373 | types: types.vim |
| 4374 | types.vim: *.[ch] |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4375 | ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\ |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4376 | awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\ |
| 4377 | {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@ |
| 4378 | |
| 4379 | And put these lines in your .vimrc: > |
| 4380 | |
| 4381 | " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists |
| 4382 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim' |
| 4383 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname) |
| 4384 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname |
| 4385 | autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif |
| 4386 | |
| 4387 | ============================================================================== |
| 4388 | 16. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm* |
| 4389 | |
| 4390 | Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the |
| 4391 | default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: > |
| 4392 | :if &term =~ "xterm" |
| 4393 | : if has("terminfo") |
| 4394 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4395 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm |
| 4396 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm |
| 4397 | : else |
| 4398 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4399 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm |
| 4400 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm |
| 4401 | : endif |
| 4402 | :endif |
| 4403 | < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] |
| 4404 | |
| 4405 | You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal, |
| 4406 | e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm". |
| 4407 | |
| 4408 | Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may |
| 4409 | be wrong. |
| 4410 | *xiterm* *rxvt* |
| 4411 | The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too. |
| 4412 | But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: > |
| 4413 | :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm |
| 4414 | :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm |
| 4415 | < |
| 4416 | *colortest.vim* |
| 4417 | To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution. |
Bram Moolenaar | f740b29 | 2006-02-16 22:11:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4418 | To use it, execute this command: > |
| 4419 | :runtime syntax/colortest.vim |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4420 | |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4421 | Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4422 | output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined |
| 4423 | at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground |
| 4424 | colors, when 't_Co' is 8. |
| 4425 | |
| 4426 | *xfree-xterm* |
| 4427 | To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be |
Bram Moolenaar | 13fcaaf | 2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4428 | included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4429 | at: > |
| 4430 | http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html |
| 4431 | Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the |
| 4432 | termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it |
| 4433 | supports. > |
| 4434 | ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query |
| 4435 | If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings. |
| 4436 | (Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding). |
| 4437 | |
| 4438 | This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): > |
| 4439 | :if has("terminfo") |
| 4440 | : set t_Co=16 |
| 4441 | : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm |
| 4442 | : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm |
| 4443 | :else |
| 4444 | : set t_Co=16 |
| 4445 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm |
| 4446 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm |
| 4447 | :endif |
| 4448 | < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] |
| 4449 | |
| 4450 | Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically |
| 4451 | translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm". |
| 4452 | Colors above 16 are also translated automatically. |
| 4453 | |
| 4454 | For 256 colors this has been reported to work: > |
| 4455 | |
| 4456 | :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm |
| 4457 | :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm |
| 4458 | |
| 4459 | Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color" |
| 4460 | and try if that works. |
| 4461 | |
| 4462 | You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file): |
| 4463 | XTerm*color0: #000000 |
| 4464 | XTerm*color1: #c00000 |
| 4465 | XTerm*color2: #008000 |
| 4466 | XTerm*color3: #808000 |
| 4467 | XTerm*color4: #0000c0 |
| 4468 | XTerm*color5: #c000c0 |
| 4469 | XTerm*color6: #008080 |
| 4470 | XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0 |
| 4471 | XTerm*color8: #808080 |
| 4472 | XTerm*color9: #ff6060 |
| 4473 | XTerm*color10: #00ff00 |
| 4474 | XTerm*color11: #ffff00 |
| 4475 | XTerm*color12: #8080ff |
| 4476 | XTerm*color13: #ff40ff |
| 4477 | XTerm*color14: #00ffff |
| 4478 | XTerm*color15: #ffffff |
| 4479 | Xterm*cursorColor: Black |
| 4480 | |
| 4481 | [Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the |
| 4482 | cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4483 | newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.] |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4484 | |
| 4485 | To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database |
| 4486 | Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): > |
| 4487 | xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults |
| 4488 | < |
| 4489 | *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor* |
| 4490 | To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas |
| 4491 | Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with |
| 4492 | these resources: |
| 4493 | XTerm*cursorBlink: on |
| 4494 | XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400 |
| 4495 | XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250 |
| 4496 | XTerm*cursorColor: White |
| 4497 | |
| 4498 | *hpterm-color* |
Bram Moolenaar | c81e5e7 | 2007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4499 | These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8 |
Bram Moolenaar | 071d427 | 2004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4500 | foreground colors: > |
| 4501 | :if has("terminfo") |
| 4502 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4503 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS |
| 4504 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S |
| 4505 | :else |
| 4506 | : set t_Co=8 |
| 4507 | : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS |
| 4508 | : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S |
| 4509 | :endif |
| 4510 | < [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>] |
| 4511 | |
| 4512 | *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal* |
| 4513 | These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal |
| 4514 | emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the |
| 4515 | bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. > |
| 4516 | :set t_Co=16 |
| 4517 | :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m |
| 4518 | :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m |
| 4519 | < |
| 4520 | *TTpro-telnet* |
| 4521 | These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware / |
| 4522 | open-source program for MS-Windows. > |
| 4523 | set t_Co=16 |
| 4524 | set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm |
| 4525 | set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm |
| 4526 | Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure |
| 4527 | that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled. |
| 4528 | (info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>) |
| 4529 | |
| 4530 | vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:ft=help:norl: |